Utax CDC 1850 Copy System Instruction

CDC 1725 |1730 |1740 |1840 |1850

Instruction Handbook

Digital Multifunctional System

Introduction

Thank you for your purchase of CDC 1725/CDC 1730/CDC 1740 /CDC 1840/CDC 1850.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy reference.

We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.

In this Operation Guide, CDC 1725/CDC 1730/CDC 1740/CDC 1840/

CDC 1850 are referred to as 25/25 ppm model, 30/30 ppm model, 40/40 ppm model, 50/40 ppm model, and 55/50 ppm model respectively.

Included Guides

The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Operation Guide (This Guide)

Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting.

Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality

Adjustments to color image quality are explained using sample images.

Safety Conventions in This Guide

The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their meanings are indicated below.

WARNING : Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION : Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [General warning]

.... [Warning of danger of electrical shock]

.... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Warning of prohibited action]

.... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.

Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Alert of required action]

.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

....

[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

i

ii

1

2

3

4

Contents

Contents

Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

Caution / Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .x

Precautions for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

Laser Safety (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Part Names

Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Preparation before Use

Check the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Switching the Language for Display [Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Installing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Embedded Web Server (Settings for E-mail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Basic Operation

Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Enter key and Quick No. Search key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Original Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Selecting Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Confirmation Screen of Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Specifying Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Using Document Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Basic Operation for Document Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Quick Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Program (Copying and Sending). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Using the Internet Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Copying Functions

Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

OPERATION GUIDE

5

OPERATION GUIDE

Contents

Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Output Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Margin/Centering Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Booklet from Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Cover Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Form Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Memo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Poster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Image Repeat/Double Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

EcoPrint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Single Color Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Color Balance Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Hue Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

One-touch Image Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Sharpness Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Background Density Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Auto Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Negative Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Priority Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

OHP Backing Sheet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Sending Functions

Original Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Sending Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Centering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

1-sided/2-sided Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

PDF Encryption Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Background Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Enter Document Name/File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Enter E-mail Subject and Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

WSD Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Send and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

iii

Contents

6

7

8

9

10

11

Send and Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

FTP Encrypted TX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Color Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

About Color Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Document Box

Using a Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Using a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Sending the Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Reordering Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Default Setting (System Menu)

Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Document Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Printing Reports/Sending Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

Adjustment/Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55

Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60

Internet Browser Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67

Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69

System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72

Restarting the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72

Network Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73

Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80

Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81

Document Guard Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81

Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83

Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84

Maintenance

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Troubleshooting

Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Responding to Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Management

User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

iv OPERATION GUIDE

Contents

Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Data Security Kit Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

Appendix

Optional Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2

Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-7

Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-10

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-18

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-28

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1

OPERATION GUIDE v

Quick Guide

Be sure to read

Precautions for Use

before using this machine.

Administrator tasks

To make copies

It copies.

Simply press the Start key to make copies. You can also fine-tune the copy settings by changing the paper size, adjusting the density, etc.

To print

It prints.

You can print via a network or print a PDF file directly from USB memory.

What you want to do

Copying with specific settings

Printing Documents

Stored in Removable

USB Memory

Print via a network

Connecting Cables

Network Setup

(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the printer driver on your computer *1

Setup

Loading Paper ...2-20

Placing Originals on the Platen ...2-32

Operation

Copying Functions

...4-1

Printing

Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory

...

6-20

*1: For more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide .

vi

Printing -

Printing from

Applications

...3-22


To send documents

You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in

USB memory.

It sends.


Send as

E-mail

Send to

Folder

(SMB)

Saving

Documents to

USB Memory

Connecting Cables

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

Plug the USB memory

Setup

Create a shared folder on the destination computer.

Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding

One Touch Keys) ...8-60

Place the originals on the platen

Operation

Sending ...3-24 *1

Sending Functions ...5-1

Saving Documents to USB Memory

(Scan to USB) ...6-22

*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address directly.

vii


To send a FAX

As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.

It faxes.

NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX System

(S) Operation Guide.


Send a FAX

FAX directly from a computer

FAX without using the telephone line

(Internet FAX (i-FAX))

Setup

Connect the modular cord for the telephone line to this machine.

Selection of Telephone Line

(Inch version only)

Network Setup

(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the Network FAX

Driver on your computer *1

Using the Address Book...3-17 on the FAX System (S) Operation Guide

Loading Paper ...2-20

*2

Operation

FAX Operation

(Basic) ...3-1 on the FAX System (S)

Operation Guide

About Network

FAX ...9-1 on the FAX System (S)

Operation Guide

Internet Fax (i-FAX)

(Optional) ...8-1 on the FAX System (S)

Operation Guide

*1:For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide .

*2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the address directly.

viii

Caution / Warning Labels

Caution / Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes. Be sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner.

High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned.

Do not touch the support area for the document processor as there is a danger that your fingers or other objects may become caught or pinched, and this can result in injury.

High temperature inside.

Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned.

Label inside the machine

(Laser radiation warning)

High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, because there is a danger of getting burned.

ix

Do not incinerate toner and toner container. Dangerous sparks may cause burn.

NOTE: Do not remove these labels.

Installation Precautions

Environment

CAUTION

Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause the machine fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage to the machine.

Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug, clean the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock.

Avoid locations near radiators, heaters or other heat sources, or locations near flammable items to avoid the danger of fire.

To keep the machine cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance, allow access space as shown below. Leave adequate space, especially around the rear cover, to allow air to be properly ventilated out of the machine.

3

15/16

"

10 cm

11

13/16

"

30 cm

11

13/16

"

30 cm

39

3/8

"

100 cm

Other precautions

The service environmental conditions are as follows:

• Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C), but humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5

°F (32.5 °C)

• Humidity: 15 to 80%, but temperature should be 86 °F or less (30 °C or less) when humidity is 80%

However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine at a temperature: around 60.8 to 80.6 °F or less (16 to 27 °C), humidity: around 36 to 65%. In addition, Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.

The machine automatically detects and displays the following message when the environmental temperature is too high or too low.

Message: "Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room temperature." or "Warning for low temperature.

Adjust the room temperature." x

To use the machine under optimum conditions, adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room if the message is displayed.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.

• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.

During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.

Power supply/Grounding the machine

WARNING

Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in the same outlet. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock.

Plug the power cord securely into the mains power outlet and the power socket on the machine. A buildup of dust around the prongs on the plug or contact between the prongs and metallic objects may cause a fire or electric shock. Incomplete electrical contact could cause overheating and ignition.

Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an earth connection is not possible, contact your service representative.


Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the machine.

Handling of plastic bags

WARNING

Keep the plastic bags that are used with the machine away from children. The plastic may cling to their nose and mouth causing suffocation.

xi

Precautions for Use

Cautions when using the machine

WARNING

Do not place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near the machine. This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside.

Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high voltage parts inside the machine.

Do not damage, break or attempt to repair the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on the cord, pull it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock.

Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine or its parts as there is a danger of personal injury, fire, electrical shock or exposure to the laser. If the laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it causing blindness.

If the machine becomes excessively hot, smoke appears from the machine, there is an odd smell, or any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the main power switch off immediately, be absolutely certain to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact your service representative.

If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other fluids, etc.) falls into the machine, turn the main power switch off immediately. Next, remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock. Then contact your service representative.

Do not remove or connect the power plug with wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical shock.

Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts.

xii

CAUTION

Do not pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. (Always grasp the power plug when removing the power cord from the outlet.)

Always remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the machine. If the power cord is damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock.

Always hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the machine.

If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.

For safety purposes, always remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning operations.

If dust accumulates within the machine, there is a danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts.

This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with your service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the machine.


Do not place heavy objects on the machine or cause other damage to the machine.

Do not open the front cover, turn off the main power switch, or pull out the power plug during copying.

When lifting or moving the machine, contact your service representative.

When moving the machine, please turn the four adjusters of the paper feeding unit until they reach the floor in order to stabilize the machine.

Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static electricity.

Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide.

Caution : Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful.

This machine comes equipped with an HDD (hard disk drive). Do not attempt to move the machine while the power is still on. Since any resulting shock or vibration may cause damage to the hard disk, be sure to turn off the power before attempting to move the machine.

In the event there is a problem with the machine’s HDD (hard disk drive), stored data may be erased. It is recommended that important data be backed up on a PC or other media. Be also sure to store originals of important documents separately.

xiii

Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness, contact a physician.

• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.

If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep.


Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of temperature and humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi

Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

xiv

Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825.

Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.

The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine.

xv

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe)

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

VORSICHT: Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung! Die anderen Schalter auf dem Gerät sind nur

Funktionsschalter und können nicht verwendet werden, um den Stromfluß im Gerät zu unterbrechen.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

TO

2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EEC, 93/68/EEC, 1999/5/EC, and 2005/32/EC

We declare under our sole responsibility that the product to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following specifications.

EN55024

EN55022 Class B

EN61000-3-2

EN61000-3-3

EN60950-1

EN60825-1

EN300 330-1

EN300 330-2

EN62301

Radio Frequency Transmitter (Europe)

This machine contains the transmitter module. We, the manufacturer hereby declare that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Radio Tag Technology (Europe)

In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.

NOTE: Product marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol includes the battery that complies with the

European Parliament and Council Directive 2006/66/EC (the "Battery Directive") in European Union.

Do not remove and dispose of the batteries included in this machine.

xvi

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

• It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.

• Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by law.

It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/ scanned.

Paper money

Bank note

Securities

Stamp

Passport

Certificate

• Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.

xvii

xviii

Legal and Safety Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.

•

Legal Information ................................................................................. xx

•

Regarding Trade Names..................................................................... xxi

•

Energy Saving Control Function ........................................................ xxv

•

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ..................................................... xxv

•

Paper Recycling................................................................................. xxv

•

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program.......................................... xxv

•

About this Operation Guide................................................................xxvi

xix

Legal Information

Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Copyright owner is prohibited.

xx

Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE and KPDL are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.

• Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

• Windows Me, Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

• Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.

• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

• AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

• This machine has been developed using embedded real-time operating system Tornado™ by Wind River

Systems, Inc.

• TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

• TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank ® .

• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype

Imaging Inc.

• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG.

• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of International Type-face Corporation.

• UFST™ MicroType ® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.

• This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co., Ltd.

• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.

• This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD.

• ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD.in the United States, Japan and other countries.

• © 2009 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved.

• This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.

xxi

GPL

Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html).

Open SSL License

Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/

/www.openssl.org/)”

4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.

For written permission, please contact [email protected].

5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF

USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY

OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

xxii

Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to.

The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])”

The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgment:

“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR

CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE

GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU

Public Licence.] xxiii

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software.

2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols ( Typefaces ) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype

Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a

License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.

3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.

4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.

5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated.

This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this

License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the

Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.

6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the

Software.

7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.

The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.

8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and

Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.

In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and

Typefaces.

9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.

10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging.

11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in

Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).

12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this

Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

xxiv

Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time.

Low Power Mode

The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 3 minutes for 25/25 ppm, 30/30 ppm, 40/40 ppm and

50/40 ppm models, or 5 minutes for 55/50 ppm model have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more information refer to

Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9

.

Sleep

The device automatically enters Sleep when 30 minutes for 25/25 ppm and 30/30 ppm models, 45 minutes for

40/40 ppm model, or 60 minutes for 50/40 ppm and 55/50 ppm models have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For more information see

Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10

.

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function

This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information

see Duplex Copying on page 3-12 .

Paper Recycling

This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR

®

) Program

We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.

xxv

About this Operation Guide

This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Chapter 1 - Part Names

Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys.

Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use

Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use.

Chapter 3 - Basic Operation

Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.

Chapter 4 - Copying Functions

Describes the functions you can use when copying.

Chapter 5 - Sending Functions

Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.

Chapter 6 - Document Box

Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.

Chapter 7 - Status / Job Cancel

Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print.

Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission

Chapter 8 - Default Setting (System Menu)

Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.

Chapter 9 - Maintenance

Describes cleaning and toner replacement.

Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting

Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems.

Chapter 11 - Management

Explains user login administration and job accounting.

Appendix

Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.

Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.

Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.

xxvi

Conventions in This Guide

The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.

Bold

Convention

[Regular]

Italic

Note

Important

Caution

Description Example

Indicates the operation panel keys or a computer screen.

Press the Start key.

Indicates the touch panel keys.

Press [OK].

Indicates a message displayed on the touch panel.

Ready to copy is displayed.

For more information refer to Sleep and

Auto Sleep on page 2-9.

Used to emphasize a key word, phrase or references to additional information.

Indicates supplemental information or operations for reference.

NOTE:

Indicates items that are required or prohibited so as to avoid problems.

Indicates what must be observed to prevent injury or machine breakdown and how to deal with it.

IMPORTANT:

CAUTION:

Description of Operation Procedure

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:

Actual procedure

Press [Copy].



Press [Next] of Quick Setup .



Press [ ] twice.



Press [Change] of Original Image .

Description in this

Operation Guide

Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick

Setup , [ ] twice, and then

[Change] of Original Image .

xxvii

Originals and Paper Sizes

This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes.

As with A4, B5 and Letter, which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction, horizontal direction is indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper.

Placement direction

Vertical direction

B B

Indicated size *

A4, B5, A5, B6,

A6, 16K, Letter,

Statement

A A

Original Paper

For the originals/paper, dimension A is longer than B.

Horizontal direction

B B

A

A

A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,

B6-R, A6-R, 16K-

R, Letter-R,

Statement-R

Original Paper

For the originals/paper, dimension A is shorter than B.

* The size of the original/paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray. For further details, refer to the page detailing that function or source tray.

Icons on the Touch Panel

The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel.

Placement direction

Vertical direction

Originals Paper

Horizontal direction xxviii

1 Part Names

This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys.

•

Operation Panel ..................................................................................1-2

•

Machine ..............................................................................................1-4

1-1

Part Names

Operation Panel

Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.

Displays the System Menu.

Displays number of sheets printed and number of pages scanned.

Displays help guidance.

Blinks during printing operation.

Blinks while data is transmitted.

Selects auto color mode.

Selects full color mode.

Selects black and white mode.

Displays the Copy screen.

Displays the screen for sending.

You can also change this to show the address book screen.

Switches the touch panel display to enlarged display in the

Copy screen or Send screen.

Displays the Document Box screen.

Displays the Application screen.

Displays the Program screen.

1-2

Part Names

Blinks while data is received.

Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory

(general-purpose item).

Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.

Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.

Ends operation (logs out) on the Administration screen.

Puts the machine into Low Power Mode.

Puts the machine into Sleep Mode.

Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.

Lit when the machine's main power is on.

1

Numeric keys.

Enter numbers and symbols.

Clears entered numbers and characters.

Recalls already registered destinations and programs for sending.

Finalizes numeric key entry, and finalizes screen during setting of functions. Operates linked with the on-screen

[OK].

Returns settings to their default states.

Cancels or pauses the printing job in progress.

Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.

1-3

Machine

1

12

4

2

3

8

9

5

6

7

10

11

1 Original Cover (Option)

2 Platen

3 Original Size Indicator Plates

4 Slit Glass

5 Left Cover 1

6 Left Cover 1 Indicator

7 Left Cover 1 Lever

8 Left Cover 2 Indicator

9 Left Cover 2

10 Left Cover 3

11 Handles

12 Clip Holder

13 Operation Panel

14 Attention Indicator ... Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped

15 Receive Indicator ... Blinks while data is received

16 Front Cover

17 Cassette 1

18 Cassette 2

1-4

13

14

15

16

17

18

Part Names

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

19 Toner Container Release Lever (Magenta)

20 Toner Container (Magenta)

21 Toner Container Release Lever (Cyan)

22 Toner Container (Cyan)

23 Toner Container Release Lever (Yellow)

24 Toner Container (Yellow)

25 Toner Container Release Lever (Black)

26 Toner Container (Black)

27 Cleaning Brush

28 Waste Toner Box

29 Waste Toner Tray

30 Release button

30

1-5

Part Names

1

34 33

32 31

Part Names

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

35

36

31 Top Tray

32 USB Memory Slot (A1)

33 Paper Feed Unit Cover

34 Paper Feed Unit

35 Green Knob

36 Paper Width Adjusting Tab

37 Paper Length Guide

38 Handles

39 Multi Purpose Tray

40 Paper Width Guide

41 Option Interface Slot (OPT2)

42 USB Port (A2)

43 Network Interface Connector

44 USB Interface Connector (B1)

45 Option Interface Slot (OPT1)

46 Main Power Switch

37 38 39

1-6

2 Preparation before Use

This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well as the procedures for loading paper and originals.

•

Check the Accessories .......................................................................2-2

•

Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables...............2-3

•

Connecting Cables..............................................................................2-5

•

Power On/Off ......................................................................................2-7

•

Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ....................................2-9

•

Sleep and Auto Sleep .......................................................................2-10

•

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ................................................2-11

•

Switching the Language for Display [Language]...............................2-11

•

Setting Date and Time ......................................................................2-12

•

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ..........................................2-13

•

Installing Software.............................................................................2-16

•

Embedded Web Server (Settings for E-mail)....................................2-17

•

Loading Paper...................................................................................2-20

•

Loading Originals ..............................................................................2-32

2-1

Preparation before Use

Check the Accessories

Check that the following accessories are included.

• Operation Guide (This Guide)

• Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality

• CD-ROM (Product Library)

Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM

The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary.

Documents

Embedded Web Server Operation Guide

Printer Driver User Guide

Network FAX Driver Operation Guide

TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide

Network Tool for Direct Printing Operation Guide

Network Print Monitor User Guide

Scan to SMB (PC) Setup Guide

Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide

2-2


Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables

Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.

Connection Example

Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.

Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network cable (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)

Administrator’s

PC

Embedded Web Server

Network settings, Scanner default settings, User and destination registration

Network Send E-mail

Sends the image data of scanned originals to the desired recipient as a file attached to an

E-mail message.

MFP

Printing

Network

USB

Send SMB

Saves the scanned image as a data file on your PC.

Network

2

Network FAX

(Option)

Network

Network

FAX (Option)

FAX

Network

Network

Send FTP

Sends the scanned image as a data file on the FTP.

TWAIN Scanning

WIA Scanning

TWAIN and WIA are standardized interface for communication between software applications and image acquisition devices.

2-3


Preparing Necessary Cables

The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables according to the interface you use.

Available Standard Interfaces

Function Interface Necessary Cable

Printer/Scanner

/Network FAX*

Printer

*

Network interface LAN (10Base-T or

100Base-TX, Shielded)

USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable

(Hi-Speed USB compliant,

Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)

Function available when using optional fax kit. For details on

Network FAX, refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide .

2-4


Connecting Cables

Connecting LAN Cable (Optional)

Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine.

1 When the machine is powered up, first press the

Power key on the operation panel. Check that the

Power indicator and the memory indicator are off.

After this, turn off the main power switch.

2

Check that the indicators are off.

2 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface located on right side of the body.

3 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.

4 Configure the network. For details, refer to

Network

Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-13 .

2-5


Connecting USB Cable

Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine.

1 When the machine is powered up, first press the

Power key on the operation panel. Check that the

Power indicator and the memory indicator are off.

After this, turn off the main power switch.

Check that the indicators are off.

2 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface located on the right side of the body.

3 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

Connecting the Power Cable

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.

IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

2-6

Power On/Off

Power On

When the main power indicator is lit...

Press the Power key.


2

When the main power indicator is off...

Open the main power switch cover and turn the main power switch on.

NOTE: If the optional Data Security Kit is installed, a message might display indicating the security function is being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on.

IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately.

Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.

2-7


Power Off

Before turning off the main power switch, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the

Power key and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.

CAUTION: The hard disk may be operating when the Power key or Memory indicator is lit or blinking. Turning off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage.

Make sure that the indicators are off.

In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time

CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.

CAUTION: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.

2-8


Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode

Low Power Mode

To activate Low Power Mode, press the Energy Saver key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver , Power , and main power indicators. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode.

If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform one of the following actions. The machine will be ready to operate within 30 seconds.

• Press any key on the operation panel.

• Open the original cover or the optional document processor.

• Place originals in the optional document processor.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

2

Auto Low Power Mode

Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time.

The default preset time is 3 minutes for 25/25 ppm model, 30/30 ppm model, 40/40 ppm model, and 50/40 ppm model or 5 minutes for 55/50 ppm model.

2-9


Sleep and Auto Sleep

Sleep

To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum amount of power except the Main Power indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is performed while the touch panel remains unlit.

When using the optional fax, received fax data is printed out while the operation panel also remains unlit.

To resume, press the Power key. The 25/25 ppm or 30/

30 ppm model will be ready to use within 30 seconds, the 40/40 ppm or 50/40 ppm model will be ready within

45 seconds, or the 55/50 ppm model will be ready within

57.5 seconds.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the Low Power Mode.

The default preset time is 30 minutes for 25/25 ppm and 30/30 ppm models, 45 minutes for 40/40 ppm model, or 60 minutes for 50/40 ppm model and 55/50 ppm models.

2-10


Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle

Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown by releasing the operation panel lock lever.

2

Switching the Language for Display [Language]

Select the language displayed on the touch panel.

Use the procedure below to select the language.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of

Language.

3 Press the key for the language you want to use.

Common Settings - Language

Set the language to use for the touch panel display.

English

Nederlands

Deutsch

ǸțșșȒȐȑ

Français

Português

Español Italiano

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4 Press [OK].

The touch panel language will be changed.

2-11


Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to

Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login

user name and password.

Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.

If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. For details, refer to

Optional Functions on page 8-83

.


Date/Timer - Time Zone

Set time zone.

Select the location nearest you.

Time Zone

-12:00 International Date Line West

-11:00 Midway Island, Samoa

-10:00 Hawaii

-09:00 Alaska

-08:00 Pacific Time (US & Canada)

-07:00 Arizona

Status

Date/Timer - Date/Time

Set the date and time.

Status

2008

Year

10

Hour

10

Month

10

Minute

Cancel

1/13

Summer Time

Off

On

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of

Time Zone .

3 Select the region.

NOTE: Press [ ] or [ ] to view the next region.

4 Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].

NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear.

5 Press [Change] of Date/Time .

6 Set the date and time. Press [+] or [–] in each setting.

7 Press [OK].

10

Day

31

Second

Off

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

2-12


Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP

(IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows,

Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms.

This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures. For other network settings, refer to the

Network Setup on 8-73 .

• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup...2-13

• AppleTalk Setup...2-15

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to

Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login

user name and password.

2

TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)

Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On , DHCP: On , Bonjour: Off , Auto-IP: On ".

NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator.

Auto-IP is available with 55/50 ppm model.

Use the procedure below.

System - IPv4

Set TCP/IP (IPv4).

Status

On

DHCP

IP Address

Default

Gateway

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Off

Bonjour

Cancel

On

Auto-IP

OK

08/08/2009 10:10


2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting .

3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP .

4 Press [On] and then press [OK].

5 Press [Change] of IPv4 .

6 Press [DHCP].

7 Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].

8 Press [Bonjour].

9 Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].

10 Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the numeric keys.

11 Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using the numeric keys.

12 Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address using the numeric keys.

2-13


13 Check if all the address entries are correct and press [OK].

14 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to

Restarting the System on page 8-72 .

DHCP Settings

Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On .







6 Press [DHCP].

7 Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].




Bonjour Settings

Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off .







6 Press [Bonjour].

7 Press [On] or [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].

2-14



Auto-IP Settings

Select whether or not to use Auto-IP. The default setting is On .









6 Press [Auto-IP].

7 Press [On] or [Off] of Auto-IP and then press [OK].




2

AppleTalk Setup

Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On .



2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then

[Change] of AppleTalk .

3 Press [On] or [Off].

4 Press [OK].




2-15


Installing Software

Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD-ROM (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your

PC.

NOTE: Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep. Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before

continuing. See Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9

and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page

2-10 .

2-16


Embedded Web Server (Settings for E-mail)

Embedded Web Server is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing the settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.

NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide .

The procedure for accessing Embedded Web Server is explained below.

1 Launch your Web browser.

2 In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address.

E.g.) http://192.168.48.21/

The web page displays basic information about the machine and Embedded Web Server as well as their current status.

2

3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each category must be set separately.

If restrictions have been set for Embedded Web Server, enter the correct user name and password to access pages other than the startup page.

For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation Guide .

2-17


Sending E-mail

Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.

•

•

•

Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following:

The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server

A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended.

SMTP Settings

Use Embedded Web Server to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.

If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.

The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

1 Click Advanced -> SMTP -> General.

2-18


2 Enter the correct settings in each field.

The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below.

Item

SMTP Protocol

SMTP Port Number

SMTP Server Name

SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.

Authentication

Protocol

Authenticate as

Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000.

Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a different account.

Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate, the login user name set here will be used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user name is

64 characters.

Login Password

Description

Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be enabled.

Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.

Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of the

SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the name, a DNS server address must also be configured. The DNS server address may be entered on the TCP/IP General tab.

POP before SMTP

Timeout

Test

E-mail Size Limit

Sender Address

When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be used for authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters.

Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds when you have selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol.

This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.

Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the value is

0, the limitation for E-mail size is disabled.

Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for

SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is

128 characters.

Signature

Domain Restriction

Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.

Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail addresses.

3 Click Submit.

2

2-19


Loading Paper

Paper can be loaded standardly in the two cassettes and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available

as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2 ).

Before Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.

1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the middle.

2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while keeping the entire stack risen.

3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create a gap and feed air between the paper.

4 Finally, align the paper on a level, flat table.

If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam.

CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for copying), do not use paper that is stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality.

NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled, turn the stack in the cassette upside down.

Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag.

If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company name, refer to

the Paper on Appendix-10

.

2-20


Loading Paper in the Cassettes

The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.

Cassette 1 holds up to 500 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m

2

) or up to 250 sheets of B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m

2

). Cassette 2 holds up to 500 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m

2

) (or up to 550 sheets of 64 g/ m

2

plain paper).

The following paper sizes are supported: Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Statement, A3,

B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, Folio, 8K, 16K, and 16K-R.

IMPORTANT:

• For clearer and brighter color copies, use the special color paper.

You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper jams or other faults.)

• When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the media type setting. (Refer to

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-28

)

The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g/m 2 . If you are using a paper weight between 106 and 163 g/m 2 , set the media type to Thick .

• Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g/m

2

in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is heavier than 163 g/m

2

.

1 Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.

NOTE: Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

2

2 Using the paper length guide, move the plate to fit the paper.

When loading A4 or smaller paper into cassette 1, lift up the paper length guide. For B4 or larger paper, lower the paper length guide.

NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.

2-21


3 Holding the paper width adjusting tab, move the paper width guides to fit the paper.

A

B

NOTE: Paper sizes are indicated on the cassettes.

To change between inch size and metric size (A, B sizes), follow the steps below to adjust the size switch.

1. Holding the paper width adjusting tab, move the paper width guide to a position other than that of the paper.

2. Turn the size switch A 90°.

>

3. Move the size lever B up (C) or down (I).

C:metric size (centimeters) (A, B sizes)

I:inch size

4. Turn the size switch 90°to lock it.

>

4 Align the paper flush against the left side of the cassette.

2-22


IMPORTANT:

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration below).

• When loading the paper, keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up.

• The paper length and width guides must be adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper without adjusting these guides may cause skewed feeding and paper jams.

• Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper. If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.

5 Insert the appropriate paper size card in the slot to indicate the size of the paper inside.

2

6 Gently push the cassette back in.

NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

7 Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded in the cassette. (Refer to

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-28 .)

2-23


Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m

2

) or up to 50 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m

2

) lager than A4.

The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.

IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always

specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30

.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m 2 or more, set the media type to Thick .

The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.

• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m

2

), recycled paper or color paper: 100 sheets

• B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m

2

), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets

• Hagaki: 30 sheets

• OHP film: 10 sheets

• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 10 sheets

NOTE:

When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and

Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30

.

When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30

.

1 Open the multi purpose tray.

2 When loading paper sizes from A3 to B4 and

Ledger to Legal, extend the support tray section of the multi purpose tray.

2-24


3 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper.

2

4 Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.

IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the package seal facing up.

Curled paper must be uncurled before use.

Straighten the top edge if it is curled.

When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.

2-25


Loading Envelopes

Up to 10 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.

Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows.

Acceptable Envelope

Monarch

Envelope #10 (Commercial #10)

Envelope DL

Envelope C5

Youkei 2

Youkei 4

Size

3 7/8"×7 1/2"

4 1/8"×9 1/2"

110×220 (mm)

162×229 (mm)

162×114 (mm)

235×105 (mm)

1 Open the multi purpose tray.

2 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the envelope.

3 For landscape form envelopes, close the flap.

Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing towards you.

For portrait form envelopes, close the flap. Insert the envelope all the way along the width guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with the flap facing the insertion slot.

2-26


When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray

Load envelope with the print side facing up.

Landscape form envelopes

Close the flap.

Cardstock (Hagaki)

Portrait form envelopes

Close the flap.

Return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki)

IMPORTANT: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki).

Close the lap of envelopes.

IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose

tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying

Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose

Tray on page 2-30

.

2

2-27


Specifying Paper Size and Media

The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2, for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder

(cassettes 3 and 4) is [Auto], and the default media type setting is [Plain].

To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting. (Refer to

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-28

.)

To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to

Specifying

Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30

.)

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes

To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 3 and 4), specify the paper size. Also, you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting.

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper

Size

Auto

Standard

Sizes 1

Paper size is automatically detected and selected. Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size.

Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.

Inch size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, 8.5×13.5" and Oficio II

Metric size: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, and Folio

Standard

Sizes 2

Media Type

*

**

Select from the standard sizes not included in

Standard Sizes 1. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.

Inch size: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,

Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K

Metric size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and

16K

Plain (105 g/m

2

or less), Rough, Vellum (64 g/m

2 or less), Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond*, Color,

Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Thick (106 g/m

2

and more)*, High Quality and Custom 1~8*

To change to a media type other than Plain

, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7 . When the paper weight settings shown below are

selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.

• Bond: Heavy 3

• Thick: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy

• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy

To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to

Special Paper Action on page 8-10 .

NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.

Plain , Recycled , Bond , Color , High Quality , Rough and Custom 1 to 8

2-28



2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /

Paper Settings , [Next] of Cassette Setting .

3 Cassette Setting , select one of [Cassette 1] to

[Cassette 4] and press [Next].

Then press [Change] of Paper Size .

NOTE: [Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are shown when the optional paper feeder is installed.

4 For automatic detection of the paper size, press

[Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.

To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] and select the paper size.

5 Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.

Common Settings - Paper Size

Set cassette paper size.

Auto

Standard

Sizes 1

Standard

Sizes 2

A3

B4

A4

B5

A4

B5

A5

Folio

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Common Settings - Media Type

Select type of paper in Cassette 1.

Plain

Recycled

Prepunched

Custom 1

Custom 6

Preprinted

Letterhead

Custom 2

Custom 7

Rough

Bond

Custom 3

Custom 8

Vellum

Thick

Custom 4

Color

High Quality

Custom 5

Cancel

Status

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

6 Press [Change] of Media Type and select the media type. Then press [OK].

2

2-29


Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray

To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size.When using other than a plain paper, specify the media type.

Item Description

Paper

Size

Auto

Standard

Sizes 1

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Paper size is automatically detected and selected.

Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size.

Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.

Inch size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,

Executive, 8.5×13.5" and Oficio II

Metric size: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4-R, B5-R, B5,

B6-R and Folio

Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard

Sizes 1. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.

Inch size: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R B4-R, B5-R, B5,

B6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K

Metric size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,

Executive, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K

Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Selectable paper sizes are as follows.

ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9

(Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4,

Youkei 2

Size

Entry

Media Type

*

**

Enter the size not included in the standard size.

Selectable paper sizes are as follows.

Inch size

X (Horizontal): 5.83~17" (in 0.01" increments),

Y (Vertical): 3.86~11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric size

X (Horizontal): 148~432 mm (in 1mm increments),

Y (Vertical): 98~297 mm (in 1mm increments)

Selectable media types are as follows.

Plain (105g /m

Vellum (64 g/m

2

2

or less), Rough, Transparency,

or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted**,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,

Envelope, Thick (106 g/m

2

and more), Coated,

High Quality and Custom 1~8

To change to a media type other than Plain , refer to

Paper Weight on page

8-7 .


Special

Paper Action on page 8-10 .

NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the available media types are as shown below.

Plain , Recycled , Bond , Color , High Quality , Rough and Custom 1 to 8

2-30



Common Settings - Multi Purpose Tray Setting

Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.

Auto

Standard

Sizes 1

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Size Entry

A3

A6

B6

A4

B4

Folio

A4

B5

Cancel

Status

Common Settings - Paper Size

Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.

Auto

Standard

Sizes 1

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Size Entry

X(148 - 432)

420

# Keys mm

Y(98 到 297)

297 mm

# Keys

Cancel

Status

Common Settings - Media Type

Select type of paper in Multi-Purpose Tray.

A5

B5

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /

Paper Settings , [Next] of MP Tray Setting , and then

[Change] of Paper Size .

3 For automatic detection of the paper size, press

[Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.

To select the paper size, press any of [Standard

Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size

Entry] and select the paper size.

If you have chosen [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You may enter the size directly using the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].


5 Press [Change] of Media Type and select the media type. Then press [OK].

Plain

Recycled

Prepunched

High Quality

Custom 5

Transparency

Preprinted

Letterhead

Custom 1

Custom 6

Rough

Bond

Envelope

Custom 2

Custom 7

Status

Vellum

Cardstock

Thick

Custom 3

Custom 8

Cancel

Labels

Color

Coated

Custom 4

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

2

2-31


Loading Originals

Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.

Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.

1 Open the original cover.

NOTE: If the optional document processor is installed, open the document processor. Before opening the document processor, be sure that there are no originals left on the original table or on the original eject table.

Originals left on the original table or on the original eject table may fall off when the document processor is opened.

Keep the document processor open if the original is

40 mm (1 5/8") or thicker.

2 Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown and align it flush against the original size indicator plates with the back left corner as the reference point.

2-32


 Original size indicator plates

(Inch models)

2

(Metric models)

3 Close the original cover.

IMPORTANT: Do not push the original cover forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen glass.

NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges and in the middle of open-faced originals.

CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.

2-33


Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are scanned.

Part Names of the Document Processor

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(1) Original placement indicator

(2) Top cover

(3) Original width guides

(4) Original table

(5) Original eject table

(6) Original stopper

(7) Opening handle

Originals Supported by the Document Processor

The document processor supports the following types of originals.

Weight

Size

Capacity

45 to 160 g/m 2 (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m 2 )

Maximum A3 to Minimum A5

Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R

Plain paper (80 g/m 2 ), Colored paper, Recycled paper:

100 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)

Thick paper (120 g/m

Thick paper (160 g/m

2

2

): 66 sheets

): 50 sheets

Art paper: 1 sheet

High quality paper (110 g/m 2 ): 72 sheets

Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor

Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals.

• Soft originals such as vinyl sheets

• Transparencies such as OHP film

• Carbon paper

• Originals with very slippery surfaces

• Originals with adhesive tape or glue

• Wet originals

• Originals with correction fluid which is not dried

• Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals

• Originals with cut-out sections

• Crumpled paper

• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).

• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).

2-34


How to Load Originals

IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table.

Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.

1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals.

2

2 Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go. The original placement indicator will be lit.

IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.

Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may cause the originals to jam (see the figure).

Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).

Original placement indicator

The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending on how originals are placed.

•

•

•

Indications and their status are as follows.

Green (left indicator) lit: Original is placed properly.

Green (left indicator) blinking: Original is not placed properly. Remove and place again.

Red (right indicator) blinking: Original is jammed.

Remove the jammed original and place it properly.

2-35

2-36


3 Basic Operation

This chapter explains the following operations.

•

Login/Logout .......................................................................................3-2

•

Enter key and Quick No. Search key ..................................................3-2

•

Touch Panel Display ...........................................................................3-4

•

Original Preview..................................................................................3-5

•

Selecting Color Mode..........................................................................3-6

•

Copying...............................................................................................3-7

•

Printing - Printing from Applications..................................................3-22

•

Sending.............................................................................................3-24

•

Specifying Destination ......................................................................3-30

•

Using Document Box ........................................................................3-33

•

Basic Operation for Document Box...................................................3-35

•

Canceling Jobs .................................................................................3-42

•

Quick Setup Screen ..........................................................................3-43

•

Program (Copying and Sending) ......................................................3-46

•

Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) ...3-46

•

Using the Internet Browser ...............................................................3-49

3-1

Basic Operation

Login/Logout

If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the machine.

NOTE: You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password.

Login

Enter login user name and password.

Local Login to:

Login

User Name abcdef

Login

Password

********

# Keys

1 If the screen shown appears during operations, press [Login User Name].

Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the numeric keys.

# Keys

Status

Check Counter Cancel

IC Card

Login

Login

10/10/2008 10:10

2 Enter the login user name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the

Character Entry Method on

Appendix-7

for details on entering characters.

3 Press [Login Password].


4 Enter the password and press [OK].

5 Check the login user name and password are correct, and press [Login].

NOTE: If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method, either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination.

Logout

To logout from the machine, press the Logout key to return to the login user name/password entry screen.

3-2

Basic Operation

Enter key and Quick No. Search key

This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No. Search key on the operation panel.

Using the Enter ( ) key

The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel, such as [OK] and [Close].

The Enter symbol (  ) is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key (e.g.

[  OK], [  Close]).

The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example. For details of the

procedure, refer to Paper Selection on page 4-3

.

Ready to copy.

Copies

1 In the paper selection screen, press the key for the cassette containing the required paper size.

Place original.

Place original.

Auto

The Enter (  ) symbol appears on the [OK] on the touch panel, indicating that the Enter key performs the same action as [OK].

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

A4

Plain

A3

Plain

A4

Plain

A4

Plain

Cancel

A4

Plain

MP Tray

Setting

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

2 To copy using the selected paper, press the Enter key (or [OK]).

Status

Using the Quick No. Search ( ) key

Use the Quick No. Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys. For example, you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by its program number.

The Quick No. Search key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel.

The use of the Quick No. Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is specified and used to select a destination. For more information on speed dialing, refer to

Specifying

Destination on page 3-30

.

1 Press the Quick No. Search key (or [No.]) in the basic send screen.

Ready to send.

Place original.

Destination

A OFFICE

B OFFICE

C OFFICE

On Hook Direct

1234567890

Detail

Enter One Touch key number using # keys.

(0001 - 1000)

0011

AAA

FFF

0001

0006

00

BBB

GGG

0007

HHH

Cancel

0008

III

0009

JJJ

OK

0010

1/10

1/100

Destination

Address

Book

E-mail

Addr Entry

Folder Path

Entry

FAX No.

Entry i-FAX

Addr Entry

WSD Scan

2 In the number entry screen, use the numeric keys to enter the speed dial number.

3 If you entered speed dial number between 1 and 3 digits long, press the Enter key (or [OK]).

The specified destination appears in the destination list.

Destination

Status

Quick Setup Original/Sending

Data Format

Color/

Image Quality

Advanced

Setup

08/08/2009 10:10

NOTE: If you enter a 4-digit speed dial number, the operation in step 3 can be omitted. The basic send screen appears and the specified destination appears in the destinations list.

3

3-3

Touch Panel Display

Display for Originals and Paper

The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray.

Size/orientation of original and paper

Press Start key to start printing.

Press [Cancel] to change settings.

Copy Image

Original

Zoom

Paper

: A4

: 100%

: A4

Cancel

Quick Setup

Status

Copies

1

Auto

Paper

Selection

2-sided

>>2-sided

Duplex

Org./Paper/

Finishing

100%

Zoom

2 in 1

Combine

Color/

Image Quality

Original position

Output tray

Paper source

Normal 0

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 4

Density

Shortcut 5

Off

Staple/Punch

Shortcut 6

Layout/Edit Advanced

Setup

10/10/2008 10:10

Basic Operation

3-4

Basic Operation

Original Preview

You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.

NOTE: To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to

Previewing Documents/Checking

Document Details on page 3-39

.

The procedure for previewing scanned originals is explained below.

The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.

Ready to copy.

Copies

1 Press the Copy key and place the original on the platen.

2 Press [Preview].

Copy Image Shortcut 1

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Quick Setup

Status

Auto

Paper

Selection

2-sided

>>2-sided

Duplex

Org./Paper/

Finishing

100%

Zoom

2 in 1

Combine

Color/

Image Quality

Normal 0

Density

Off

Staple/Punch

Layout/Edit

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 5

Shortcut 6

Advanced

Setup

10/10/2008 10:10

Press Start key to start printing.

Press [Cancel] to change settings.

Copy Image

Original

Zoom

Paper

: A4

: 100%

: A4

Cancel

Quick Setup

Status

Auto

Paper

Selection

2-sided

>>2-sided

Duplex

Org./Paper/

Finishing

100%

Zoom

2 in 1

Combine

Color/

Image Quality

Normal 0

Density

Off

Staple/Punch

Layout/Edit

Copies

Shortcut 1

1

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 5

Shortcut 6

Advanced

Setup

10/10/2008 10:10

3 The machine starts scanning the original. When scanning is completed, the preview image appears on the panel.

4 To change the quality or the layout, press [Cancel] or the Stop key. Change the settings and press

[Preview] again to see a preview image with the new settings.

NOTE: If you scan a multi-page original, only the first page is previewed.

5 If there is no problem with the preview image, press the Start key. Copying begins.

3

3-5

Basic Operation

Selecting Color Mode

When you scan and then copy, send or store documents, you can select the color mode used for scanning from the operation panel.

Automatically recognizes whether scanned documents are color or black & white.

Scans all documents in full color.

Scans all documents in black & white.

The basic procedure for selecting the color mode is explained below, using an example in which the scanned document is copied.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen.

3 Press the Auto Color key, Full Color key or Black

& White key to select the color mode.

4 Specify the required settings for copying.

5 Press the Start key.

NOTE: You can fine-tune the color mode from the touch panel.

• Copying: You can use Single Color copying in Cyan, Green, etc.

(page 4-29) .

• Sending/Storing: You can select Auto Color (Color/

Gray) , Auto Color (Color/B & W) or Grayscale

(page 5-21) .

You can also change the default color mode for copying and sending/storing. For details, refer to

Color Selection

(Copy) on page 8-17

or

Color Selection (Send/

Store) on page 8-18 .

3-6

Basic Operation

Copying

Follow the steps as below for basic copying.

1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator is off.

NOTE: If the touch panel is turned off, press the

Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the machine to warm up.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the optional document processor.

NOTE:

For loading instructions, refer to Loading

Originals on page 2-32

.

3

Ready to copy.

Copy Image

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Quick Setup

Status

Auto

Paper

Selection

2-sided

>>2-sided

Duplex

Org./Paper/

Finishing

100%

Zoom

2 in 1

Combine

Color/

Image Quality

Copies

Shortcut 1

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 4

Normal 0

Density

Off

Staple/Punch

Layout/Edit

Shortcut 5

Shortcut 6

Advanced

Setup

10/10/2008 10:10

3 Check that [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection on the touch panel. Paper that matches the size of the original will be selected automatically.

To change the paper size, press, [Org./Paper/

Finishing], [Paper Selection] and select the desired paper source.

NOTE: Select paper size manually, if necessary, instead of using automatic paper selection.

4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Specify the desired number up to 999.

5 Press the Start key to start copying.

6 Remove the finished copies from the top tray.

3-7

Basic Operation

Adjusting Density

Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying.

Density Adjustment Option

Manual

Auto

Description

Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.

Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original.

NOTE:

You may choose Auto mode as the default setting (refer to Density on page 8-19

).

The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.


Density

Ready to copy.

Copies

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Set the original on the platen and press [Color/

Image Quality] -> [Density].

4 Adjust density manually pressing [-3] (Lighter) to

[+3] (Darker). You can change the density level [-3]

(Lighter) to [+3] (Darker) in half-steps.

Auto

Place original.

Lighter

-3 -2 -1

Normal

0 +1 +2

Darker

+3

To change density adjustment from Manual to Auto, press [Auto].

5 Press [OK].

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

---

100%

: ---

Preview

-2.5

-1.5

-0.5

+0.5

+1.5

+2.5

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-8

Basic Operation

Selecting Image Quality

Select image quality suited to the type of original.

The table below shows the quality options.

Image Quality Option

Text+Photo

Text

Photo

Printed Photo

Map

Printed Document

Description

For originals with both text and photographs.

For originals primarily consisting of text.

For photos taken with a camera.

For photos printed in magazines, etc.

For maps, etc.

For documents printed from this machine.

The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.

Ready to copy.

Original Image

Copies

1



3 Set the original on the platen and press [Color/

Image Quality] -> [Original Image].

4 Select the image quality.

5 Press [OK].

Select original image type for best results.

[Printed Document]: Suitable for documents printed from this machine.

Place original.

Text+Photo Photo Printed Photo

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Text Map

Cancel

Printed

Document

OK

10/10/2008 10:10


3

3-9

Basic Operation

Zoom Copying

Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.

Auto Zoom

Ledger: 129 %

Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image suitably to the selected paper size.

Letter-R

A4

A3: 141 %

Statement-R: 64 %

A5: 70 %

Manual Zoom

Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.

25 %

400 %

Preset Zoom

Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.

The following magnifications are available.

Model

Inch Models

Metric Models

Metric Models (Asia

Pacific)

Zoom Level (Original Copy)

100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (STMT >>

Ledger), 154%(STMT >> Legal), 129% (Letter >>

Ledger), 121% (Legal >> Ledger), 78% (Legal >>

Letter), 77% (Ledger >> Legal), 64% (Ledger >>

Letter), 50% (Ledger >> STMT), 25% (Min.)

100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),

141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4), 127% (Folio >>

A3), 106% (11×15" >> A3), 90% (Folio >> A4),

75% (11×15" >> A4),

70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)

100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),

141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4), 122% (A4 >> B4,

A5 >> B5), 115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4), 86%

(A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5), 81%(B4 >> A4, B5 >>

A5), 70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5), 50%, 25%

(Min.)

3-10

Basic Operation

XY Zoom

Select vertical and horizontal magnifications individually. Reduce or enlarge original images in 1% increments between 25% and 400%.

Y

X

The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.


Ready to copy.

Copies


3 Set the original on the platen and press [Layout/

Edit] -> [Zoom].

4 Press [Standard Zoom] to use Auto Zoom.

1

Zoom

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Status

Add Shortcut

Standard

Zoom

XY Zoom

400%

Max.

200%

A5>>A3

141%

A4>>A3

A5>>A4

127%

Folio

>>A3

106%

11x15"

>>A3

(25 - 400)

400 %

# Keys

100%

Auto

90%

Folio

>>A4

75%

11x15"

>>A4

70%

A3>>A4

A4>>A5

50%

25%

Min.

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed magnification as desired. You can also enter the magnification directly using the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].

When using Preset Zoom, select the key of desired magnification.

When using XY Zoom, press [XY Zoom].

Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed magnifications of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).

You can also enter the magnification directly using the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].

Zoom

Ready to copy.

Copies

Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge

Left]. Then press [OK].

Standard

Zoom

XY Zoom

X

(25 - 400)

100

%

Place original.

Y

# Keys

(25 - 400)

100

% Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

# Keys

Cancel

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

5 Press [OK].


3

3-11

Basic Operation

Duplex Copying

Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available.

You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.

The following modes are available.

One-sided to Two-sided

4

5

5

Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.

2

3

2

4

1

3

1 abc def ghi

Original

Original Copy

A abc ghi def def

Copy

B abc ghi

The following binding options are available.

A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right : Images on the second sides are not rotated.

B Original Left/Right to Binding Top : Images on the second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation when turning the pages.

Two-sided to One-sided

2

1

Original

Two-sided to Two-sided

5

2

1

4

3

Original

1 2

Copy

2

1

4

3

5

Copy

Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets. The optional document processor is required.

•

•


Binding Left/Right are not rotated.

: Images on the second sides

Binding Top : Images on the second sides are rotated 180°.

Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.

The optional document processor is required.

NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to

Two-sided are Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,

Executive, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", A3, B4,

A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R and Folio.

3-12

Basic Operation

Book to One-sided

1

Original

2 1

Copy

2

Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book original.

•

•


Binding Left : Originals with facing pages are copied from left to right.

Binding Right : Originals with facing pages are copied from right to left.

NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Two-sided to One-sided and Book to Onesided. Original: Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R,

A5-R and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4, B5 and 16K. You may change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to match that size.

3

Book to Two-sided

1 2 3 4

Facing pages

-> Two-sided

Facing pages

-> Facing pages

2

1

4

3

0

1 2

3

2 1 4 3

2

1

4

3

3

2 1

0

Produces two-sided copies from an open book original with facing pages.

NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are supported in Book to Two-sided mode. Original:

Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R and 8K.

Paper: Letter, A4 and B5.

Original Copy

The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.



3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Duplex].

Duplex

Ready to copy.

Copies

4 Select the desired Duplex option.

5 If you choose [1-sided>>2-sided] or

[2-sided>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the finished copies of Finishing .

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

1-sided

>>1-sided

1-sided

>>2-sided

2-sided

>>1-sided

2-sided

>>2-sided

Book

>>1-sided

Book

>>2-sided

Finishing

Binding

Left/Right

Binding

Top

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

If you choose [Book>>2-sided], press [Book>>2sided] or [Book>> Book] of Finishing to select the setting for duplex.


10/10/2008 10:10 Status

3-13

Basic Operation

Ready to copy.

Duplex

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

1-sided

>>1-sided

1-sided

>>2-sided

2-sided

>>1-sided

2-sided

>>2-sided

Book

>>1-sided

Book

>>2-sided

Original

Binding

Left/Right

Binding

Top

Cancel

Copies

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

6 If you choose [2-sided>>1-sided],

[2-sided>>2-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or

[Book>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the originals of Original .

7 Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge


8 Press [OK].


Once an original placed on the platen is scanned, replace it with the next one. Then, press the Start key.

After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to start copying.

Collate/Offset Copying

The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies.

You can use the Collate/Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below.

Collate

Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of copies as required according to page number.

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

Original

Offset

Without Document Finisher

1

2

3

1

2

3

Copy

1

2

3

Original Copy (each set)

If the optional document finisher is not installed, when you use offsetting, printed copies are produced after rotating each set (or page) by 90º.

NOTE: You need to load the same sized paper with different orientation in the paper source other than the selected paper source. The paper sizes supported in

Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.

3-14

Basic Operation

With Document Finisher

1

2

3

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

When you use offsetting, printed copies are segregated after each set of copies (or after each page).

NOTE: The optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is required.

3

Original Copy (each set)

Ready to copy.

Collate/Offset

Collate

Place original.

Off On

Copies

Offset

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

---

100%

: ---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Ready to copy.

Collate/Offset

Collate

Place original.

Off

Off

Cancel

Each Set

On

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Copies

If [Off] is selected for Collate , press [Off] or [Each

Page] of Offset .

5 Press [OK].

Offset

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Off

Cancel

Each Page

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

The procedure for using collate/offset copying is explained below.



3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Collate/

Offset].

4 To use collate copying, press [On] of Collate .

To use offset copying, press [Each Set] of Offset .

Press [OK].


3-15

Basic Operation

Reserve Next

This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the original will be scanned while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed. The procedure differs depending on the Reserve Next Priority

(refer to page 8-28 ).

If Reserve Next Priority is set to [On]

The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing.

Ready to copy.

Copies

1 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy, and configure the copy settings.

Copy Image Shortcut 1

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Quick Setup

Status

Auto

Paper

Selection

2-sided

>>2-sided

Duplex

Org./Paper/

Finishing

100%

Zoom

2 in 1

Combine

Color/

Image Quality

Normal 0

Density

Off

Staple/Punch

Layout/Edit

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 5

Shortcut 6

Advanced

Setup

10/10/2008 10:10


The machine starts scanning the originals.

When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed.

If Reserve Next Priority is set to [Off]

The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing.

Copying...

Copies

1 Press [Reserve Next].

Job No.: 000021

Scanner Setting

Scanned Pages

Job Name: doc20081010101034 User Name: -----

Printer Setting

Copies

The default screen for copying appears.

2 2/

Plain

24

A4

100%

2-sided

Top Edge Top

A4

2-sided

Collate

Top Tray

Cancel Reserve Next

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

2 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving copy, and configure the copy settings.


The machine starts scanning the originals.

When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed.

3-16

Basic Operation

Interrupt Copy

This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.

When interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.

NOTE: If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and printing resumes. You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled. Change the

delay as required. For more information, refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 8-59 .

Ready for interrupt copy.

Copy Image

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Quick Setup

Status

Auto

Paper

Selection

2-sided

>>2-sided

Duplex

Org./Paper/

Finishing

100%

Zoom

2 in 1

Combine

Color/

Image Quality

Copies

Shortcut 1

1

Shortcut 2

Normal 0

Density

Off

Staple/Punch

Layout/Edit

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 5

Shortcut 6

Advanced

Setup

10/10/2008 10:10

1 Press the Interrupt key.

Ready for interrupt copy.

is displayed.

The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.

3 Press the Start key to start interrupt copying.

4 When interrupt copying ends, press the Interrupt key.

The machine resumes the paused print jobs.

3

3-17

Basic Operation

Staple

Use this feature to staple your finished copies.

NOTE: Stapling requires the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher. Note also that saddle stitching (center stapling) requires the folding unit.

The following stapling options and orientations are available.

Original Orientation:

Top Edge (Back Edge)


Top Edge (Back Edge)


Left Top Edge (Left top corner)


Left Top Edge (Left top corner)

3,000 Sheet Document

Finisher

Cassette Paper Load

Direction

3,000 Sheet Document

Finisher


Direction

Document Finisher


Direction



Direction

3-18

Basic Operation

Use the procedure below to produce stapled copies.

Ready to copy.

Staple/Punch

Staple

Off

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

---

100%

: ---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Punch

Off

Copies

Top

Left

Top

Right

2 staples

Left

2 holes

Left

2 holes

Top

2 holes

Right

2 staples

Top

2 staples

Right

Bind and Fold

4 holes

Left

4 holes

Top

4 holes

Right

Cancel

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

OK

10/10/2008 10:10



3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Staple/

Punch].

4 Select the staple position.

NOTE: To use saddle stitching, press [Bind and Fold].

When placing originals, be sure to place the cover page at the bottom. For more information on saddle stitching, refer to

Booklet from Sheets on page 4-18 .

5 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge


6 Press [OK].


3

3-19

Basic Operation

Punch

Punch holes in sets of finished copies in preparation for binding.

NOTE: Requires the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and punching unit.

The orientations of the original and corresponding punch positions are as follows.

Original Copy Orientation of Original

Platen Document processor

NOTE: The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole punching.

Follow the steps as below for punching.



3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing]and then press

[Staple/Punch].

3-20

Ready to copy.

Staple/Punch

Staple

Off

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

---

100%

: ---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Punch

Off

Basic Operation

Copies

Top

Left

Top

Right

2 staples

Left

2 holes

Left

2 holes

Top

2 holes

Right

2 staples

Top

2 staples

Right

Bind and Fold

4 holes

Left

4 holes

Top

4 holes

Right

Cancel

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4 Select the type of hole punching.



6 Press [OK].


If the original is placed on the platen. Place the next original and press the Start key. Copying begins.

If all original pages have been scanned, press

[Finish Scan]. Copying begins.

3

3-21

Basic Operation

Printing - Printing from Applications

Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.

NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied

CD-ROM (Product Library).

1 Create a document using an application.

2 Click File and select Print in the application. The

Print dialog box appears.

3 Click the  button next to the Name field and select this machine from the list.

4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of copies box. Enter any number up to 999.

When there is more than one document, select

Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of the page numbers.

5 Click Properties button. The Properties dialog box appears.

3-22

Basic Operation

6 Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to select the paper size.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click the Media Type menu and select the media type.

3

7 Click Source and select the paper source.

NOTE: If you choose Auto Select , paper is supplied automatically from the paper source loaded with paper of optimum size and type. To print on special paper such as envelope or thick paper, place it on the multi purpose tray and select MP Tray .

8 Select paper orientation, either Portrait or

Landscape , to match the orientation of the document.

Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document rotated 180°.

9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.

10 Click OK button to start printing.

3-23

Basic Operation

Sending

This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.

A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.

At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box.

To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps:

• Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.

• Use Embedded Web Server (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the

SMTP server, and the recipient.

• Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys.

• When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. For setting-up the PC Folder, contact your administrator.

• Creating/Registering a Document Box (when a Document Box is selected as the destination)

• Detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image at the same time)

Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.

• Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-25

• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-26

• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-26

• Send to Document Box: Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine...page 6-6

• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Loads the document data stored in a Custom Box to a PC...Refer to the TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide

NOTE:

Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of

Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-32 .

3-24

Basic Operation

Send as E-mail

Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

NOTE:

• You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any time over a LAN.

• Access the Embedded Web Server beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For

details, see Embedded Web Server (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-17 .

1 Press the Send key.


Ready to send.

Place original.

E-mail Address Entry

E-mail

Address

Add a new e-mail destination.

Press [E-mail Address], then enter the address using the keyboard screen.

Destination

NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to display the screen for sending.

2 Press [E-mail Addr Entry] and then [E-mail

Address].

NOTE: Destination can be specified using the

Address Book or the One Touch Keys. Refer to

Specifying Destination on page 3-30

.

3

Status

Add to Addr Book Next Dest.

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10

3 Enter destination E-mail address and press [OK].

4 Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 3 to specify the destination. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be specified.

NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the destinations are registered in the Address Book.

5 Press [OK]. The destinations are registered in the destination list.

3-25

Basic Operation

ABCD

Ready to send.

Place original.

Destination [email protected]

Detail

TUVW 10.200.188.120

Group1 Group1

On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete

To:

Auto

Recall

1/1

AAA

0001

BBB

0002

CCC

0003

DDD

0004

EEE

0005 No.

0006

FFF

Destination

Status

GGG

0007

HHH

0008

Quick Setup

III

0009

Original/Sending

Data Format

JJJ

0010 1/100

Color/

Image Quality

Destination

Address

Book

E-mail

Addr Entry

Folder Path

Entry

FAX No.

Entry i-FAX

Addr Entry

WSD Scan

Advanced

Setup

08/08/2009 10:10

6 Check the destination list.

Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check and edit it.

Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove the destination from the list.

NOTE: When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New

Destination (

page 8-31

), the confirmation screen appears. Enter the same destination again and press

[OK].

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send

(

page 8-30

), the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start

key. For details, refer to Confirmation

Screen of Destinations on page 3-29 .

Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP)

Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC.

Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.

NOTE:

• Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder.

• Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the Embedded Web Server is On . For details, refer to the Embedded

Web Server Operation Guide .




2 Press [Folder Path Entry] and then [SMB] or [FTP].

NOTE: Destination can be specified using the

Address Book or the One Touch Keys. For details, refer

to Specifying Destination on page 3-30

.

3-26

Basic Operation

Ready to send.

Place original.

Folder Path Entry

SMB Host Name

FTP

Path

Login

User Name

Login

Password

Specify the folder on the destination computer.

Status


Cancel

Destination

Connection

Test

OK

08/08/2009 10:10

3 Enter host name, path, login user name and login password. Press the key of each item to first display the entry screen.

4 Enter the destination data and press [OK].

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

!

@

Z

Upper-case

X

# $ % ^

V B

No./Symbol

N

& *

M <

Space

( ) _ +

Q

A

W

S

E

D

R

F

T

G

Y

H

U

J

I

K

O

L

P

:

{

"

}

C > ?

Cancel

Status

˜

|

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Data to be entered are as follows.

NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password. Contact your administrator and check your login user name or login password.

3

For send to folder (SMB)

Item Data to be entered

Max. characters

Host Name*

Path

Login User Name

Login Password

*

Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data.

Up to 70 characters

Path to the receiving folder such as follows.

For example, \User\ScanData .

Up to 128 characters

User name to access the PC

For example, abcdnet\james.smith

Password to access the PC

Up to 64 characters

Up to 64 characters

To specify a port number different from the default (139), enter using the format “host name: port number” (e.g., SMBhostname:140).

To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].

(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

3-27

Basic Operation

For send to folder (FTP)

Item Data to be entered

Max. characters

Host Name*

Path

Host name or IP address of FTP server

Path to the receiving folder.

For example, \User\ScanData .

Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.

FTP server login user name

Up to 70 characters

Up to 128 characters

Login User Name

Login Password

*

FTP server login password

Up to 64 characters

Up to 64 characters

To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format “host name: port number” (e.g., FTPhostname:140).



Ready to send.

Place original.

Folder Path Entry

SMB Host Name

FTP

Path

Login

User Name

Login

Password

Specify the folder on the destination computer.

Status


Cancel

Destination

Connection

Test

OK

08/08/2009 10:10

5 Upon completion of all entries, press [Connection

Test] to check the connection.

NOTE: Connected.

appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If Cannot connect.

appears, review the entry.

To specify another destination, go to the step 6. To specify only one destination, go to step 7.

6 Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 3 to 5 to specify the destination. You can specify a combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB destination folders.

NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the entry is registered in the Address Book.

7 Press [OK] to register the entry in the destination list.

3-28

Basic Operation

ABCD

Ready to send.

Place original.


Detail

TUVW 10.200.188.120

Group1 Group1


To:

Auto

Recall

1/1

AAA

0001

BBB

0002

CCC

0003

DDD

0004

EEE

0005 No.

0006

FFF

Destination

Status

GGG

0007

HHH

0008

Quick Setup

III

0009

Original/Sending

Data Format

JJJ

0010 1/100

Color/

Image Quality

Destination

Address

Book

E-mail

Addr Entry

Folder Path

Entry

FAX No.

Entry i-FAX

Addr Entry

WSD Scan

Advanced

Setup

08/08/2009 10:10

8 Check the destination list.

Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check and edit it. Edit it, if necessary, referring to steps 3 to 5.

Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove the destination from the list.

NOTE: When On is selected in

FTP Encrypted TX

(page 5-31) , keys appear for selecting the encryption

method for the FTP transmission destination. Select

Auto , DES , 3DES or AES as the encryption method.

When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New

Destination (

page 8-31

), the confirmation screen appears. Enter the same host name and path again, and press [OK].

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send

(

page 8-30

), the confirmation screen appears after pressing the Start

key. For details, refer to Confirmation

Screen of Destinations on page 3-29 .

3

Confirmation Screen of Destinations

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send ( page 8-30 ), the confirmation screen of destinations

appears after pressing the Start key.

Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations.

Ready to send.

Place original.

Destination

1 Press [ ] or [ ] to confirm every destination.

Destination

A OFFICE

Detail

Press [Detail] to display the detailed information on the selected destination.

1234567890

Detail

Delete

To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The destination is deleted.

Check

To add the destination, press [Cancel] and then return to the destination screen.

Cancel

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

2 Press [Check].

NOTE: Be sure to confirm every destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot press

[Check] unless you have confirmed every destination.

3 Press the Start key to start sending.

3-29

Basic Operation

Specifying Destination

When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys.

NOTE: You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key.

For details, refer to

Setting the Default Send Screen on page 8-32

.

Choosing from the Address Book

Select a destination registered in the Address Book.

ABCD

Ready to send.

Place original.


Detail

TUVW

Group1

10.200.188.120

Group1


To:

Auto

Recall

1/1

AAA

0001

BBB

0002

CCC

0003

DDD

0004

EEE

0005 No.

FFF

0006

Destination

Status

GGG

0007

HHH

Quick Setup

0008

III

0009

Original/Sending

Data Format

JJJ

0010 1/100

Color/

Image Quality

Destination

Address

Book

E-mail

Addr Entry

Folder Path

Entry

FAX No.

Entry i-FAX

Addr Entry

WSD Scan

Advanced

Setup

08/08/2009 10:10

1 In the basic screen for sending, press [Address

Book].

Address Book

Addr Book Address Book

Dest.

No.

0001

Type

ABCD

Name

0002

0003

0004

0005

TUVW

Group1

Group2

Group3

Sort [email protected]

[email protected]

Name

Detail

ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ 0-9

E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX

Cancel

Group

1/2

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

Register/Edit

Address Book

Detail

Status

OK

08/08/2009 10:10

2 Press the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. You may choose multiple destinations. The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use an address book on the LDAP server, select [Ext

Address Book] from the Addr Book pull-down menu.

You can change the order in which the destinations are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.] from the Sort pull-down menu.

NOTE: To cancel the selection, press the check box and remove the checkmark. For details on the external address book, refer to Embedded Web Server

Operation Guide .

3 Press [OK] to register the selected destination in the destination list.

NOTE: To delete a destination in the list, select the destination and press [Delete].

3-30

Basic Operation

Destination Search

Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.

Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Address Book

Addr Book Address Book

Dest.

No.

0001

Type

ABCD

Name

0002

0003

0004

0005

TUVW

Group1

Group2

Group3

Sort [email protected]

[email protected]

Name

Detail

ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ 0-9

E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX

Cancel

Group

1/2

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

Register/Edit

Address Book

Detail

Status

OK

08/08/2009 10:10

1

2

Keys used

3

4

Search type

Search by name

Search by address number

Advanced search by initial letter

Advanced search by destination

Subjects searched

Search by registered name.

Search by registered address number.

Advanced search by initial letter of registered name.

Advanced search by type of registered destination

(E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX, i-FAX or Group).

(FAX: Only when the optional fax kit is installed.i-FAX:

Only when the optional internet fax kit is installed).

You can set this function up so that destination types are selected when the address book is displayed.

For more information, refer to

Narrow Down

Settings on page 8-66

.

The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below.

Search by name

Press [Search(Name)] and enter the required name.

Search by address number

Press [Search(No.)] and enter the address number you wish to search.

Advanced search by initial letter

Press the key for the required initial letter.

Advanced search by destination

Press any of [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX], [i-FAX] or [Group]. The destinations registered by that type are displayed.

3-31

3

Basic Operation

Choosing by One Touch Key

ABCD

Ready to send.

Place original.


Detail

TUVW 10.200.188.120

Group1 Group1

To:

Auto 1/1

On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall

AAA

0001

BBB

0002

CCC

0003

DDD

0004

EEE

0005 No.

0006

FFF

Destination

Status

GGG

0007

HHH

0008

Quick Setup

III

0009

Original/Sending

Data Format

JJJ

0010 1/100

Color/

Image Quality

Destination

Address

Book

E-mail

Addr Entry

Folder Path

Entry

FAX No.

Entry i-FAX

Addr Entry

WSD Scan

Advanced

Setup

08/08/2009 10:10

Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.

In the basic screen for sending, press the One Touch

Keys where the destination is registered.

NOTE: If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, press [ ] or

[ ] to scroll and view next or previous One Touch

Keys.

This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.

Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on page 8-64 for more information on adding One Touch

keys.

Choosing by Speed Dial

ABCD

Ready to send.

Place original.


Detail

TUVW 10.200.188.120

Group1 Group1


To:

Auto

Recall

1/1

AAA

0001

BBB

0002

CCC

0003

DDD

0004

EEE

0005 No.

0006

FFF

Destination

Status

GGG

0007

HHH

0008

Quick Setup

III

0009

Original/Sending

Data Format

JJJ

0010 1/100

Color/

Image Quality

Destination

Address

Book

E-mail

Addr Entry

Folder Path

Entry

FAX No.

Entry i-FAX

Addr Entry

WSD Scan

Advanced

Setup

08/08/2009 10:10

Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to

1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial).

In the basic screen for sending, press the Quick No.

Search key or [No.] and use the numeric keys to enter the One Touch key number in the numeric entry screen.

NOTE: if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit, press [OK].

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (optional).

This is referred to as Multi Sending . This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation.

No. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100

Folders (SMP, FTP) : Total of 10 SMB and FTP

FAX i-FAX

: Up to 500

: Up to 100

Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.

Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to all destinations at one time.

3-32

Basic Operation

Using Document Box

What is Document Box?

Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among multiple users.

Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions.

Custom Box...page 6-2

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval.

You can create or delete a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below:

• Creating a box...page 6-2

• Storing Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-4

• Printing a Document in a Custom Box...page 6-5

• Sending a Document from a Custom Box...page 6-6

• Moving/ Copying /Joining Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-8

• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-11

Job Box

Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print, Stored Job,

Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, Repeat copy and Form Overlay which will be discussed later.

Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box.

These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.

NOTE: You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted. For details, refer to

Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents on page 6-17

.

Private Print/Stored

Job Box...page 6-12

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel. When sending the job from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver.

The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job.

The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off.

In Hold Job, access codes are not mandatory, but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is required. In this event, you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs. Print data will be stored in the hard disk after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box...page 6-13

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed.

Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the

Quick Copy Job Box.

3

3-33

Basic Operation

When additional copies are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel.

By default, up to 32 documents can be stored.

When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

NOTE: When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum, the oldest document data will be overwritten by the latest document data.

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining copies.

Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while maintaining the document data in the Job Box.

To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel.

You can change the number of copies to print.

Repeat Copy Box...page 6-15

Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional copies later.

By default, up to 32 documents can be stored.

When power is turned off, the original data will be deleted.

NOTE: Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.

Form for Form Overlay Box...page 6-17

Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image.

This Job Box is used to store the forms or images for overlaying.

Removable Memory Box

A USB memory inserted into the USB memory slot (A1) of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box. This allows printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory.

You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC.

Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).

Fax Box

Fax Box stores the fax data received. For details, refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit.

3-34

Basic Operation

Basic Operation for Document Box

This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom boxes.

NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User

Logon privileges, refer to

User Privileges on page 3-40

.

The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below.

1 Press the Document Box key.

No.

0001

Custom Box.

Name

SALES

Custom Box

Status

Owner

Anonymous

Job Box

Store File Detail

Removable Memory

Used Area

- - - -

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

1/1

Register/Edit

Box

Open

FAX Box

08/08/2009 10:10

The default document box screen appears.

2 Press [Custom Box], [Job Box] or [Removable

Memory] to select the type of document box you want to work with.

In this example, press [Custom Box].

The box list screen appears.

You can use this screen for tasks such as registering and editing boxes. For more information on using the box list, refer to

Custom Box List on page 3-36 .

Custom Box.

No.

0001

0002

0003

Name

0001 Box

0002 Box

0003 Box

Owner

1 User

2 User

3 User

Used Area

10%

20%

30%

1/1

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

Register/Edit

Box

NOTE: For more information on registering boxes,

refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2

.

You cannot access boxes if you forget your password.

In this event, access the machine using administrator privileges and overwrite your box password.

3 Select the box containing the document you want to work with and press [Open].

The document list screen appears.

You can use this screen for tasks such as printing and sending documents. For more information on using the document list, refer to

Document List on page 3-37 .

Job Box

Store File Detail

Removable Memory

Open

FAX Box Custom Box

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

3

3-35

Basic Operation

Custom Box List

The box list shows the registered custom boxes. The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name.

You can manipulate the list in a range of ways, as shown below.

Listing the boxes by number in ascending/ descending order.

Custom Box.

No.

0001

0002

0003

Name

0001 Box

0002 Box

0003 Box

Owner

1 User

2 User

3 User

Listing the boxes by name in alphabetical order.

Used Area

10%

20%

30%

1/1

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

Register/Edit

Box

Registers new boxes and checks, modifies or deletes box information.

Custom Box

Status

Job Box

Store File Detail Open

Removable Memory FAX Box

08/08/2009 10:10

Saves the document in the selected box.

Opens the selected box.

Displays the details for the selected box.

3-36

Basic Operation

Document List

The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.

List

Listing the documents by name in alphabetical order.

Listing the documents by time of update in ascending/descending order.

Listing the documents by size in ascending/descending order.

Selecting more than one document at a time.

Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

Box:

0001

0002

0003

File Name

0404200710574501

0404200710574511

0404200710574521

Print

Status

Send Join

Date and Time Size

10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB

10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1

Search(Name)

Move/Copy Delete

Detail

Preview

Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10

Highlighting a document to display its details with [Detail].

Previews the selected document.

3

Thumbnail

Selecting more than one document at a time.

Highlighting a document to display its details with

[Detail].

Box:

SALES

040420075501 040420075502

Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

Print

Status

Send Join

Switches between list display and thumbnail display.

Move/Copy Delete

1/1

Search(Name)

Prints, sends, joins, moves, copies or deletes the selected documents.

Detail

Preview

Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10

Saves the document in the open box.

NOTE: You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note that you cannot select multiple documents when you are sending documents.

3-37

Basic Operation

Viewing/Editing Box Details

You can check and modify box information.


Document Box/Removable Memory - Register/Edit Box

No.

0001

Name

SALES

Owner

Anonymous

Used Area

- - - -

1/1

Add

1 Press [Register/Edit Box] in the box list screen.

2 Highlight the box whose details you wish to check or edit and press [Detail/Edit].


Status

Box:

Box No.:

0001

Box Name:

SALES

Box Password:

********

Auto File Deletion:

30 day(s)

Free Space:

30 GB

Status

Change

Change

Change

Change

Detail/Edit Delete

Close

10/10/2008 10:10

Usage Restriction:

21 MB

Change

Overwrite Setting:

Permit

Delete after Printed:

Off

Cancel

Change

Change

Register

08/08/2009 10:10

3 Check the box details.

To edit details, press [Change] of the detail you wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and press

[OK].

4 If you have changed the details, press [Register] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

If you did not change the details, press [No].

5 Press [Close]. The display returns to the default

Document Box screen.

3-38

Basic Operation

Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details

You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details for checking.


1 Select (highlight) a document to preview and then press [Preview] or [Detail].

2 Preview the document or check the document details.

The operations available in the preview screen are shown below.

When you have zoomed in, you can use these keys to move the displayed area.

Preview: 2007040410574501

No.

Size

Resol.

Color

:

:

:

In multiple-page documents, you can change pages by entering the desired page number.

3

Status

1/6

In multiple-page documents, you can use these buttons to change pages.

Zoom out.

Close

08/08/2009 10:10

Zoom in.

3 When you have finished previewing documents or checking document details, press [Close].

3-39

Basic Operation

User Privileges

When user login administration is enabled, accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending on the given user privilege.

Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows:

Access level

Accessibility

Operation

Box information

Creating a box

Changing box owner

Deleting a box

Changing box number

Renaming a box

Changing the password to a box

Overwriting the password to a box

Others

Owner

Others

Owner

Adjusting the box capacity

Others

Owner

Changing the owner Others

Owner

Changing the permission

Others

Owner

Changing the period of using a box

Others

Owner

Others

Owner

Others

Owner

Others

Owner

Administrator

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

User

Restricting the Accessibility to a Box

The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows:

Administrator: An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes.

User: A user can gain access and manipulate his/her own boxes and the shared boxes.

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

3-40

Basic Operation

Password Entry Requirement

When user login administration is enabled, requirement of a password differs depending on the level of privileges as follows:

User: to any box.

The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box which is protected by a password. The user is not required to enter a password to gain access to his/her own boxes.

3

Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled

Box: **

Box No.:

0001

Box Name:

SALES

Box Password:

**********

Change

Change

Change

Owner:

DCBA9876

Usage Restriction:

21 GB

Permission:

Private

Change

Change

Change

If you create a new Custom Box when user login administration is enabled, the screen appears and you can change the owner and permission settings. Only administrators and machine administrators can create new Custom Boxes.

Auto File Deletion:

30 day(s)

Free Space:

30 GB

Status

Change

Overwrite Setting:

Permit


Off

Cancel

Change

Change

Register

08/08/2009 10:10

Changing the owner: Press [Change] of Owner and select the new owner for the box from the displayed list.

Then press [OK].

Changing the permission:Press [Change] of

Permission and select either

[Private] or [Shared]. Then press [OK].

NOTE: For information on specifying other settings,

refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2

.

Working With User Privileges When User Login Administration is Enabled

Box:

Box No.:

0001

Box Name:

SALES

Box Password:

********

Change

Change

Owner:

DCBA9876

Usage Restriction:

21 MB

Permission:

Private

Change

When user login administration is enabled, the owner of a box with user privileges set can change the following box information: the box name, the box password, the permission, the auto file deletion and the overwrite setting.

Overwrite Setting:

Auto File Deletion:

30 day(s)

Change

Permit

Change

Free Space:

30 GB


Off

Change

Cancel Register

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

3-41

Basic Operation

Canceling Jobs

Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.

Canceling Jobs

You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key.

Printing jobs

1 Press the Stop key.

Cancelling job screen appears.

The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

2 Select the job you wish to cancel and press

[Cancel]. And then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Sending jobs

1 Press the Stop key.

Job Cancel appears.

NOTE: Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.

2 To cancel printing, select [Cancel], and then press

[Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Copies

Copying...

Job No.: 000021

Scanner Setting

Scanned Pages

2

A4

100%

2-sided

Top Edge Top

Job Name: doc20081010101034 User Name: -----

Printer Setting

Copies

2/

Plain

24

A4

2-sided

Collate

Top Tray

Status

Cancel Reserve Next

10/10/2008 10:10

NOTE:

If Reserve Next Priority

(refer to page 8-28 ) is set to

[Off]

The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during printing.

1 Press the Stop key or [Cancel].

The current print job is cancelled.

3-42

Basic Operation

Quick Setup Screen

In the initial screen for copying and sending (the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key is first pressed after power-on), important and generally often used functions are registered from among the versatile functions of this machine. This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen. Registration of functions in the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency.

Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen

Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows.

3

Function

Copying

Sending

Default Registration

1: Paper Selection

2: Zoom

3: Density

4: Duplex

5: Combine

6: Staple/Punch

1: Zoom

2: Scan Resolution

3: FAX TX Resolution

4: Density

5: 2-sided/Book Original

6: File Format

Functions Available for

Registration

• Paper Selection

• Zoom

• Density

• Duplex

• Combine

• Staple/Punch

• Original Orientation

• Collate/Offset

• Color Selection

• Original Image

• Original Size

• Continuous Scan

• Zoom

• Scan Resolution

• FAX TX Resolution

• Density

• 2-sided/Book Original

• File Format

• Original Size

• Sending Size


• Original Image

• Color Selection

• Continuous Scan

3-43

Basic Operation

Function

Document

Box

Document

Storage

Default Registration

1: Color Selection

2: Resolution

3: Density

4: 2-sided/Book Original

5: Original Orientation

6: Original Image

Sending

From Box

Printing

From Box

1: File Format

2: Delete after Transmitted

3: FAX TX Resolution

4: Sending Size

1: Paper Selection

2: Delete after Printed

3: Collate/Offset

4: Duplex

5: Staple/Punch

6: Combine

Functions Available for

Registration

• Color Selection

• Resolution

• Density



• Original Image

• Original Size

• Zoom

• Continuous Scan

• Storing Size

• File Format

• Delete after Transmitted

• FAX TX Resolution

• Sending Size

• Paper Selection

• Delete after Printed

• Collate/Offset

• Duplex

• Staple/Punch

• Combine

Changing Registration

The following procedure is one example for replacing the registration of Density with Original Image in the

Quick Setup Screen for copying.

Ready to copy.

Copy Image

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Quick Setup

Status

Auto

Paper

Selection

2-sided

>>2-sided

Duplex

Org./Paper/

Finishing

100%

Zoom

2 in 1

Combine

Color/

Image Quality

Copies

Shortcut 1

Normal 0

Density

Off

Staple/Punch

Layout/Edit

Shortcut 2

Shortcut 3

Shortcut 4

Shortcut 5

Shortcut 6

Advanced

Setup

10/10/2008 10:10


2 Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick Setup Registration , and then [Change] of Original Image .

3-44

Status

Copy - Original Image

Register Original Image function on the Quick Setup screen.

Off

Key 1

Key 4

Key 2

Key 5

Key 3

Key 6

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Basic Operation

3 Press [Key 3] here as the key to set replacement location.

4 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears. Press

[Yes]. The Original Image Quality function will be newly registered.

3

3-45

Basic Operation

Program (Copying and Sending)

By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number as needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.

NOTE: Sending operation can be registered in the program as well. Up to 50 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program.

If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.

Registering Programs

Use the procedure below to register a program.

The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.

1 Press the Program key while the copy mode is accessed.

2 Press [Register] and press a number (01 to 50) for the program number.

If entering Program screen from the Copy screen or

Send screen, go to step 4.

NOTE: If you select a program number already registered, the currently registered functions can be replaced with a new set of functions.

3 Check that [Copy] is selected, and press [Next].

4 Enter the new program name and press [Register] to register the program.

Recalling Programs

Use the procedure below to recall a registered program.

01 FAX 1

Program recalling.

06

No.

1 Press the Program key.

2 Press [Recall] and press the key corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to recall. Press the

Quick No. Search key or [No.] to enter the program number directly for recalling.

02 FAX 2 07

03

04

05

08

09

10

NOTE: If the program cannot be recalled, the

Document Box or the form overlay specified in the program might have been deleted. Check the

Document Box.

Status

Recall Register Edit

10/10/2008 10:10 3 Place the originals and press the Start key.

Copying is performed according to the registered program.

3-46

Basic Operation

Editing and Deleting Programs

You can change program number and program name, or delete program.

Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program.

1 Press the Program key.

2 Press [Edit] and press the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to change or delete.

3 To edit a program, use the procedure for registering a program and press [Change]. Then change the program number and program name and press

[Register]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to change the program.

To delete the program, press [Delete this Program].

Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to finally delete the program.

3

3-47

Basic Operation

Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)

Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary. You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions, sending functions, and functions set for document box.

Adding Shortcuts

Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.

Use the procedure below to register a shortcut.

Ready to copy.

Copies

1 After making the desired settings in the setup screen of each function, press [Add Shortcut].

Memo Page

Layout

Off

Layout A

Place original.

Top

L to R

Top

R to L

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Layout B

Top

L to B

Top

R to B

Cancel

None

Border Line

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

2 Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to register.

NOTE: If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new one.

3 Enter the shortcut name and press [Register] to add the shortcut.

Editing and Deleting Shortcuts

Follow the steps as below to change shortcut number/name or delete shortcut.

1 In the setup screen of each function, press [Add

Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen.

2 Press [Edit] and press the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (01 to 06) to change or delete.

3 To edit a shortcut, press [Change] to change the shortcut button number and name and press [OK] and then [Register]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to change the shortcut.

To delete the shortcut, press [Delete this Shortcut].

Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to delete the shortcut.

3-48

Basic Operation

Using the Internet Browser

This section explains how to use the Internet browser.

NOTE:

To use the internet browser, internet browser must be set to [On] in Internet Browser Setting on page

8-67 .

Launching and Exiting the Browser

Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser.

1 Press the Application key.

Application

The application list screen appears.

2 Press [Internet Browser].

The Internet browser starts up.

3

Internet Browser

Status 10/10/2008 10:10

3 Use the browser screen to browse web pages.

For information on how to use the browser screen, refer to

Using the Browser Screen on page 3-50 .

4 To exit the browser, press [X] (Close) and then press [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.

The application list screen reappears.

NOTE: You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed. For details,

refer to Internet Browser Setup (page 8-67)

.

3-49

Basic Operation

Using the Browser Screen

The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.

Title bar

Displays the page title.

Search box

Pressing the text box displays a keyboard.

You can then perform a search by entering a keyword and pressing the [Search].

Close

Closes the Internet browser and returns you to the application list screen.

UTAX - Home

Scroll bars

These allow you to scroll the displayed page up, down, left and right by pressing [ ], [ ],

[ ] or [ ] or by moving one of the slide bars with your finger.

Security lock icon

Displayed when you are viewing a protected page.

Enter URL Search Menu

Status

Enter URL

Use this display a desired web page by entering the URL for that page.

Home page

Displays your specified home page.

You can set your home page in the

Browser Preferences on page 8-67

.

Reload

Updates the page.

Back/Forward

Displays the previous page or the next page.

10/10/2009 10:10

Loader/Progress bar

Shows the status of page loading. When the browser is loading a web page, the loader changes to an animated display.

Menu

Displays the browser setup menu. You can use this menu to specify the browser's display magnification, set the text encoding scheme and check the server certificate.

Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page)

Displays a search menu in which you can select [Retrieval in page] or an Internet search site.

Search Internet: Use the selected search site to search with the entered keyword.

Retrieval in page: Search from the entered keyword in the currently displayed page. You can continue your search by pressing

[SearchUp] or [SearchDown].

NOTE: Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application list screen without displaying the browser exit

3-50

4 Copying Functions

This chapter explains the functions available for copying.

•

Original Size........................................................................................4-2

•

Paper Selection...................................................................................4-3

•

Mixed Size Originals ...........................................................................4-6

•

Original Orientation .............................................................................4-9

•

Output Destination ............................................................................4-11

•

Combine Mode..................................................................................4-12

•

Margin/Centering Mode ....................................................................4-14

•

Border Erase.....................................................................................4-16

•

Booklet from Sheets..........................................................................4-18

•

Cover Mode ......................................................................................4-21

•

Form Overlay ....................................................................................4-22

•

Page Numbering ...............................................................................4-23

•

Memo Mode ......................................................................................4-24

•

Poster................................................................................................4-26

•

Image Repeat/Double Copy..............................................................4-27

•

EcoPrint ............................................................................................4-29

•

Single Color Copy .............................................................................4-29

•

Color Balance Adjust ........................................................................4-30

•

Hue Adjustment ................................................................................4-31

•

One-touch Image Adjust ...................................................................4-33

•

Sharpness Adjust..............................................................................4-34

•

Background Density Adjust...............................................................4-35

•

Continuous Scan...............................................................................4-36

•

Auto Image Rotation .........................................................................4-37

•

Negative Image.................................................................................4-37

•

Mirror Image......................................................................................4-38

•

Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................4-39

•

File Name..........................................................................................4-41

•

Priority Override ................................................................................4-41

•

Repeat Copy .....................................................................................4-42

•

OHP Backing Sheet Mode ................................................................4-44

4-1

Copying Functions

Original Size

Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to specify the original size when copying non-standard sizes.

The following options are available.

Item How to Select Sizes

Standard

Sizes 1

Have the size of original detected automatically, or select from the standard sizes.

Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,

Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II and

11×15"

Standard

Sizes 2

Select from the standard sizes not included in the

Standard Sizes 1.

Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4,

A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R and Folio

Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R,

B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R

Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,

Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 11×15",

8K, 16K and 16K-R

Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to 4 Others

Size Entry

Select from envelope, postcard or the custom sized originals*.

Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and 2**.

Inch models

Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2 to

11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models

Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),

Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

* For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to

Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-4 .

** The input units can be changed in the System menu.

Refer to

Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-11 .

Use the procedure below to select the original size.



3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original

Size].

4-2

Copying Functions

Original Size

Ready to copy.

Place original.

Standard

Sizes 1

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Size Entry

Auto

A4

A6

B5

Folio

B4

B6

A3

A5

Cancel

Copies

B5

B6

A4

A5

1

4 Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],

[Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Ready to copy.

Original Size

Place original.

Standard

Sizes 1

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Size Entry

X

Y

(50 - 432)

432 mm

# Keys

(50 - 297)

297 mm

# Keys

Cancel

Copies

If [Size Entry] is selected, press [+] or [-] to specify the horizontal size (X) and the vertical size (Y).

Press [# Keys] to enter the size directly using the numeric keys.

5 Press [OK].


OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Paper Selection

Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.

NOTE:

Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper

Settings on page 8-4

).

4

Selecting the Cassette

Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.


Ready to copy.

Place original.

Copies


3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper

Selection].

4 Press the key of the paper source corresponding to the required paper size. The cassette in which the paper is loaded is selected.

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Auto

A4

Plain

A3

Plain

A4

Plain

A4

Plain

Cancel

A4

Plain

MP Tray

Setting

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.

5 Press [OK].


4-3

Copying Functions

Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray

Change the paper size and media type.

The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

Category Item

How to

Select

Sizes

Paper

Size

Standard

Sizes 1

Choose from the standard size.

Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,

Statement, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II and Executive

Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R,

A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R and Folio

Media

Type

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Choose from the standard sizes not included in the Standard

Sizes 1.

Choose from non-standard sizes and custom sizes.

Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,

B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R


Statement, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, Executive, 8K,

16K and 16K-R

ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),

Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6

(Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch,

Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,

Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and

Custom 1 to 4*

Size

Entry

Enter the size not included in the standard sizes 1 and

2**.

Inch models

Horizontal: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments),

Vertical: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models

Vertical: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments),

Horizontal: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Plain (105 g/m

Vellum (64 g/m

2

2

or less), Transparency, Rough,

or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond, Cardstock,

Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,

Thick (106 g/m

2

or more), Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8***

*

**

For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-4

.

The input units can be changed in the System menu.

Refer to

Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-11

.

*** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to

Paper Weight on page 8-7

.

To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper

Action on page 8-10 .

NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default (refer to

Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-6 ).

4-4

Copying Functions

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.


Ready to copy.

Copies


3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing], [Paper Selection] and then [MP Tray Setting].

4 Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],

[Others] or [Size Entry] to select the paper size.

Paper Selection - MP Tray Setting

Standard

Sizes 1

A3

A5

Standard

Sizes 2

B5

Others

Folio

Size Entry

A4

A6

B5

A4

B4

B6

Plain

Media Type

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Ready to copy.

Original Size

Standard

Sizes 1

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

X

Size Entry

Y

(148 - 432)

432 mm

# Keys

(98 - 297)

297 mm

Copies

If you select [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to specify

X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You can enter the size directly using the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

5 Press [Media Type].

# Keys

Plain

Media Type

OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Cancel

6 Select paper type, and press [OK].

7 Press [OK].

8 Press [OK].

9 Press the Start key to start scanning the originals.

10 When the machine is ready, the confirmation screen for the specified paper appears. Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and press

[Continue] to start copying.

4

4-5

Copying Functions

Mixed Size Originals

Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied. In this operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.

Supported Combinations of Originals

Originals of the Same Width

The supported combinations of originals are as follows.

Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)

Letter Ledger Ledger Letter

Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)

Legal Letter-R

B4 and B5

4-6

Copying Functions

Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only)

Place all originals of different widths. The supported combinations of originals are as follows.

NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio, A4-R, and B5-R, make sure to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On] for [Folio].

For more information, refer to Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only) on page 8-9 .

A3, B4, A4 and B5 4

B4, A4-R and B5

Folio, A4-R and B5-R

4-7

Copying Functions

Selecting How to Copy Originals

Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size paper matching the original sizes or to produce all copies on the same size paper.

NOTE: This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.

The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options.

Option Description

Mixed Size Copies Originals are detected individually for size and copied to the same size paper as originals.

Same Size Copies Originals are all copied to the same size paper.

Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals.

Ready to copy.

Mixed Size Originals

Off

Place original.

Mixed Size

Copies

Same Size

Copies

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Original Width

Same Width

Top Page Direction

Long Edge

Left

Cancel

Copies

Different

Width

Short Edge

Left

OK

10/10/2008 10:10


2 Place originals on the document processor.

IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different widths, be sure to flush them against the document width guide toward the back of the machine.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Mixed Size

Originals].

4 Select [Mixed Size Copies] or [Same Size Copies] as finish size.

5 Select the combination of originals from [Same

Width] and [Different Width].

When [Same Size Copies] is selected, select [Long

Edge Left] or [Short Edge Left] as the first original orientation.

6 Press [OK].


4-8

Copying Functions

Original Orientation

Select the original orientation to use the following functions.

• Zoom (XY Zoom)

• Duplex

• Margin/Centering originals

• Border erase

• Combine mode

• Memo mode

• Page numbering

• Booklets

* /PunchIf [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 8-15 setting in the System Menu, the

selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.

When placing originals on the platen

4

Original [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

When placing originals on the optional document processor


NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to

Original Orientation on page 8-16 .

4-9

Copying Functions

Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.



3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original

Orientation].

Ready to copy.

Original Orientation

Place original.

Select the orientation of the original document's top edge.

Copies

4 Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] as the way the original is oriented.

5 Press [OK].


Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

---

100%

:

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Top Edge Top Top Edge Left

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4-10

Copying Functions

Output Destination

You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your copies.

NOTE: Optional output destinations include the job separator, document finisher, 3,000 sheet document finisher, and mailbox.

The table below shows the available output destinations.

Destination Description

Top tray

Finisher Tray*

Top tray of the machine (where copies are stored)

Tray of the optional document finisher

Tray A, Tray B*, Tray C* Trays A to C in the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher

Job Separator Tray Optional job separator

Tray 1 to 7*

*

Trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray)

Copy output orientation can be selected either as face-up (print facing up) or facedown (print facing down).

4

NOTE: To change default destination for copies, refer to

Paper Output on page 8-14

for details.

Use the procedure below to select the output destination.

Ready to copy.

Copies



3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper

Output].

4 Select the output destination for finished copies.

Paper Output

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Top Tray

Job Separator

Tray

Tray 4

Tray A

Tray 1

Tray 5

Tray B

Tray 2

Tray 6

Face Up

Face Down

Tray C

Tray 3

Tray 7

When you select [Finisher Tray], [Tray B], [Tray C] or [Tray 1] to [Tray 7], select the orientation of output copy, Face Up (print facing up) or Face

Down (print facing down).

5 Press [OK].



10/10/2008 10:10 Status

4-11

Copying Functions

Combine Mode

This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The page boundary of each original can be indicated.

NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, B4, Folio, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,

Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.

2-in-1 Mode

For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals onto one sheet.

The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.

Original Copy Orientation of Original

Platen Document processor

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

4-in-1 Mode

For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals onto one sheet.

The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.

Original Copy Orientation of Original

Platen Document processor

4-12

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

Types of Page Boundary Lines

The following types of the boundary lines are available.

Copying Functions

4

None Solid Dotted Borders

(Cropmark)

The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.

Ready to copy.

Copies



3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Combine].

4 Press [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], and choose the page layout of Layout.

Combine

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Off

2 in 1

4 in 1

Layout

Right then

Down

Down then

Right

Left then

Down

Down then

Left

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

5 Press [Border Line] to choose the type of the lines to indicate page boundaries. Press [OK].



7 Press [OK].

Status

None

Border Line

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation


If the original is placed on the platen, replace the original and press the Start key.


4-13

Copying Functions

Margin/Centering Mode

Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left (right) or top (bottom) side.

When you copy onto paper different from the original size, you can center the original image on the paper.

The following margin widths are available.

Input units

Inch Models

Metric Models

Margin Width

-0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

-18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments)

Margin on the Back Side

When duplex copying, you can also specify the margin on the back side.

Auto

When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin specified for the front page and a binding orientation.

Separate Front/Back Margins

Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately.

NOTE: You can set the default margin width. Refer to

Margin Default on page 8-22

for details.

Use the procedure below to make copies with margins.

Copies



3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Margin/Centering].

4 Press [Margin] to select the copy with margin.

Ready to copy.

Margin/Centering

Off

Left/Right

Use [+] or [–] to enter the margins for Left/Right and

Top/Bottom . Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.

Place original.

Margin

(-18 - +18)

0 mm

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Centering

Top/Bottom

# Keys

(-18 - +18)

0 mm

Auto

Back Page

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

For duplex copying, press [Back Page] and select

[Auto] or [Manual].

# Keys

Cancel Add Shortcut OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

4-14

Copying Functions

Copies

Ready to copy.

Margin/Centering - Back Page

Auto

Place original.

Manual

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Ready to copy.

Margin/Centering

Off

Margin

Place original.

Centering

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Left/Right (-18 - +18)

6 mm

Top/Bottom

# Keys

(-18 - +18)

6 mm

# Keys

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Copies

Cancel

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

If you selected [Auto], press [OK]. If you pressed

[Manual], enter the margins in the displayed screen and then press [OK].

Press [Centering] to center the original image on the paper.



6 Press [OK].


4

4-15

Copying Functions

Border Erase

Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when making copies.

The following options can be selected.

Border Erase Sheet

Erases black borders around the single sheet original.

Original

Border Erase Book

Copy

Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book.

Original

Individual Border Erase

Copy

Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.

Original Copy

In each option, the available ranges are as below.

Input units

Inch Models

Metric Models

Border Erase Range

0 to 2"(in 0.01" increments)

0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)

NOTE: To specify the default width value of Border Erase, refer to

Border Erase Default on page 8-21 for

details.

4-16

Copying Functions

Border Erase to Back Page

When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table below shows the available settings.

Item

Same as Front

Page

Do Not Erase

Detail

Border Erase performed using the same setting as the front page

No Border Erase performed on the back page 4

NOTE: You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page. For details, refer to

Paper

Selection on page 8-27 .

Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying.


Ready to copy.

Border Erase

Copies


3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Border Erase].

4 Select [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase borders for a book.

Off

Border (0 - 50)

6 mm

Place original.

Border Erase

Sheet

Border Erase

Book

Individual

Border Erase

Gutter

# Keys

(0 - 50)

6 mm

Same as

Front Page

Back Page

Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Border or Gutter .

Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview # Keys


10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Border Erase

Ready to copy.

Off

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Border Erase

Sheet

Border Erase

Book

Individual

Border Erase

Copies

Top

Bottom

Left

Right

(0 - 50)

6 mm

6 mm

6 mm

6 mm

Same as

Front Page

Back Page

# Keys

Cancel

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the individual border erase.

Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Top , Bottom , Left or Right . Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.

Press [Original Orientation] to select the original orientation from either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge


For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].

5 Press [OK].


4-17

Copying Functions

Booklet from Sheets

The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.

You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to

Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8-10

.

NOTE: Using the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your copies (fold them in two with staples in the center). This is limited to the A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R.

The supported original and paper sizes are as follows.

Type of Original Original Size Paper Size

One-sided original,

Two-sided original

All*

Book original

All *

A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,

Ledger, Letter-R and 8K

A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,

Ledger and Letter-R

* Except for custom sized originals.

For binding on the left side

A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R,

Ledger, Legal, Letter and Letter-R

A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal and Letter-R

A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, Letter and Letter-R

A4-R and Letter-R

The folded copies can be read from left to right.

Original

For binding on the right side

Copy

The folded copies can be read from right to left.

Original Copy

4-18

For top binding

Copying Functions

The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.

Original Copy

The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below.


Ready to copy.

Copies


3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Booklet].

4 Press [1-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from single-sided originals.

Booklet

Original

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Off

1-sided

>>Booklet

2-sided

>>Booklet

Book

>>Booklet

Finishing

Binding

Left/Right

Binding

Top

Binding

Left

Binding

Right

Binding

Top

Cancel

Off

Cover

Off

Saddle

Stitch

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

Press [2-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from two-sided originals.

Press [Book>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from an open book original.

Add Shortcut OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

5 If you selected [2-sided>>Booklet] or

[Book>>Booklet], choose the binding orientation in

Finishing.

If you selected [1-sided>>Booklet], choose the binding orientation in Finishing.

6 If you choose [1-sided>>Booklet],

[2-sided>>Booklet], or [Book>>Booklet] you can add the cover. Press [Cover], select [Cover] and press [OK].



8 If the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and folding unit are installed, the [Saddle Stitch] option is displayed.

To use saddle stitching, press [Saddle Stitch] and then press [Bind and Fold]. You can saddle stitch up to 16 sheets (64 pages).

9 Press [OK].

10 Platen and press the Start key. Copying begins.

4

4-19

Copying Functions

NOTE: When using the platen, be sure to place the originals in page order.

If the originals are placed on the platen, consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key.


4-20

Copying Functions

Cover Mode

Add a cover to the finished copies. You can copy the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray.

To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8-10

.

Type of Cover

Front Cover

Front and Back

Covers

Description

First page of the originals is copied on a different paper.

First page and last page of the originals are copied on different paper.

The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below.



3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Cover].

Cover

Ready to copy.

Copies

1

4 Press [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers].

5 Press [OK].

Place original.

Print cover pages on the different type of paper, using a different paper source.

Select either [Front Cover] or

[Front and Back Covers].

*Set paper source for cover in System Menu.

4

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Off Front Cover Front and Back

Covers

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10


If the originals are placed on the platen, consecutively replace each original after pressing the Start key.


4-21

Copying Functions

Form Overlay

Forms Original Copy

Density

:30%

Copy the original images onto the form. Once you scan and register the form, the form is overlaid onto the original. You can also use a form that is already registered in the machine's memory.

NOTE:

To register a form in advance, refer to Form for

Form Overlay Box on page 6-17 for details.

Density

:100%

Follow the steps as below for form overlay.

Ready to copy.

Form Overlay

Off

Place original.

Select

Stored Form

Scan

New Form

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Ready to copy.

Form Overlay - Select Form

Document Box

Box Name

Form for Form Overlay

Custom Box

Status

Density (10 㵨 30, 100)

10

%

Copies

1


2 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Form Overlay].

3 Press [Scan New Form] to use the first page of originals as a form.

NOTE: You can select the form density setting through

4 levels from 10%, 20%, 30% or 100%. Press the [+] or

[-] buttons in Density .

Cancel

None

Select

Form

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Copies

1

Up

Cancel

1/1

Detail

Preview

Open

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

To use the forms already registered, press [Select

Stored Form]. Press [Select Form] to display the document boxes that store documents which can be used as a form. Select the desired form from the list and press [OK].

NOTE: To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].

4 Press [OK].

5 Place the originals.

Place the original for the form on top of the other originals. When using the optional document processor, the first page of the originals should be placed on the top.


4-22

Copying Functions

Page Numbering

Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order. The formats for numbering are [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n]. The format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the place of n .

Select Top Left , Top Middle , Top Right , Bottom Left , Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering position.

4

Original [ – 1 –] [P.1] [1/n]

Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies.



3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Page #].

Page #

Off

-1-

P.1

1/n

Ready to copy.

Position

1st Page

Top

Left

Bottom

Left

(1 - 10)

1

Top

Middle

Bottom

Middle

Start #

# Keys

Top

Right

Bottom

Right

(1 - 999)

1

# Keys

Copies

Auto

Last Page

Auto

Denominator

#

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

1

4 Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P.1] or

[1/n].

5 Select the page numbering position.

6 To start page numbering from a page other than the first page, press [+] or [–] of 1st Page and select the starting page. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

7 To start the numbering with a number other than 1, press [+] or [–] of Start Number and enter the starting number. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

8 If you do not want page numbering through to the last page, press [Last Page]. Select Manual and use [+] or [-] to enter the final page to be numbered

(a negative number of pages counting backwards from the last page). Then press [OK]. You can set a value up to -10. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

4-23

Copying Functions

9 The total number of pages n in the format [1/n] can be changed manually. Press [Denominator #] and select [Manual]. Press [+] or [–] to enter the total number of pages and press [OK]. You can also enter the number with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].


Left]. Press [OK].

11 Press [OK].


Memo Mode

Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space or add lines to indicate page boundaries.

NOTE: Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R,

Statement-R, A3, B4, Folio, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.

Layout A

Reduces images of each original page for printing onto half of a page, leaving the other half blank for notes.

Layout B

Original Copy

Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto half of a single page, leaving the other half blank for notes.

Original Copy

4-24

Copying Functions

Types of Page Boundary Lines

The following boundary lines are available.

None Solid Dotted Borders

(Cropmark)

Use the procedure below to insert page boundary lines on your copies.



3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Memo Page].

Memo Page

Ready to copy.

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Off

Layout A

Layout B

Layout

Top

L to R

Top

L to B

Top

R to L

Top

R to B

Cancel

Copies

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4 Press [Layout A] or [Layout B]. Select the page layout from Layout .

5 Press [Border Line] to select the page boundary line. Press [OK].

6 Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge

Left]. Press [OK].

7 Press [OK].

Status

None

Border Line

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation


4

4-25

Copying Functions

Poster

Original Copy

For using this device to make copies larger than the maximum paper size, use Poster mode to separate and copy an enlarged image onto multiple pages.

The completed copies have overlapping areas. A single large page can be created by pasting those areas together.

Choose one of the following 3 enlargement settings:

• Copy size – The output paper size is chosen from the following sizes. Copy is enlarged according to the selected paper size.

Model Type

Inch models

Metric models

34 × 44", 22 × 34", 17 × 22"

A0, A1, A2

Paper size

• Zoom prioirty – Specify the output zoom size from

100 to 400%. Image will be output on the necessary number of copies for the specified zoom size.

• Number of sheets – Select number of sheets to split the image from 2, 4, or 8 sheets. Copy is enlarged according to the selected number.

NOTE: The available original sizes are 11 × 17",

8 1/2 × 11", A3 and A4R. The available paper sizes are 11 × 17" and A3 only.

Follow the steps as below to use poster enlargement.

Ready to copy.

Poster

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Off

Copy Size

Zoom

Priority

Number of

Sheets

A0

Copies

Separate and copy an image suitable for the selected copy size.

A1

Cancel

A2

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

1 Press Copy key.


3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Poster].

4 Select enlargement method.

If [Copy Size] is selected, set the output paper size.

If [Zoom Priority] is selected, set the output zoom size.

If [Number of Sheets] is selected, set the number of split pages.

5 Press [OK].


4-26

Copying Functions

Image Repeat/Double Copy

Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can also specify the area of the original to repeat.

Image Repeat

Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at a specified magnification.

You can also specify how much of the original is repeatedly copied.

4

Original Copy

Double Copy

Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet.

For example, you can double-copy an A4 original onto an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies that are identical to the original.

Original Copy

Follow the steps as below to use Image Repeat/Double Copy.

1 Press Copy key.

Ready to copy.

Copies


3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Image Repeat].

4 Press [Zoom Priority].

1

Image Repeat

Place original.

Off

Zoom

Priority

Double

Copy

(25 - 400)

100

%

# Keys

To make double copies, press [Double Copy] and proceed to step 8.

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the zoom size.

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Off

Specify

Repeat Area

Press [# Keys] to enter with numeric keys.

6 To set the area of the original to be repeated, press

[On] for Specify Repeat Area.


10/10/2008 10:10 Status

4-27

Copying Functions

7 Press [+] or [–] to input the area of the original to be repeated.

With metric models, you can enter the border width directly using the numeric keys after pressing [#-

Keys].

Y1 : Length from top left of platen to top edge of repeat area

X1 : Length from Height from top left of platen to left edge of repeat area

Y2 : Height of repeat area

X2 : Width of repeat area

8 Press [OK].


4-28

Copying Functions

EcoPrint

Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high quality print is unnecessary.

The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.



3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [EcoPrint].

EcoPrint

Ready to copy.

Copies

4 Press [On].

5 Press [OK].

Conserve toner when printing.

Use EcoPrint for test copies and other situations where high-quality copies are not necessary.

Place original.

4

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Off On

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10


Single Color Copy

Specify one of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, or Blue, and produce copies with that color regardless of original type.

Follow the steps as below for Single Color Copy.

Ready to copy.

Color Selection

Auto Color

Single Color

Copies

1

1 Press Copy key.


3 Press [Color/Image Quality], [Color Selection] and then press [Single Color].

4 Select color for copying from [Cyan], [Magenta],

[Yellow], [Red], [Green] or [Blue].

5 Press [OK].

Full Color

Place original.

Cyan Magenta Yellow

Black &

White

Single Color

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Red Green

Cancel

Blue

OK

10/10/2008 10:10


4-29

Copying Functions

Color Balance Adjust

Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments.

NOTE: This feature is used with full color copying.

This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density (see page 3-8

).

This feature can not be used together with One touch Image Adjust (see page 4-33 ).

Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality .

Follow the steps below to adjust color balance.

Ready to copy.

Color Balance

Off

Place original.

On

Copies

Cyan -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5

Magenta -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5

Yellow -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5

Black -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5

1 Press Copy key.


3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Color

Balance].

4 Press [On].

5 Press [ ] or [ ] on each side of the color to be adjusted ( Cyan , Magenta , Yellow , Black ) to adjust each color.

6 Press [OK].

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10


4-30

Copying Functions

Hue Adjustment

Adjust the color (hue) of images. Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a strong green-yellow to make more creative copies.

The items that may be configured are as follows.

Red

Magenta

Yellow

Green

Cyan

• All : Adjust hue for all colors.

• Yellow - Green & Blue - Magenta : Adjust color balance for yellow and green, and blue and magenta.

• Green - Cyan & Magenta - Red : Adjust color balance for green and cyan, and magenta and red.

• Cyan - Blue & Red - Yellow : Adjust color balance for cyan and blue, and red and yellow.

Blue


This feature can not be used together with Adjusting

Density (see page 3-8

).

This feature can not be used together with One touch

Image Adjust mode (see page 4-33 ).

These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images.

Follow the steps below to use image hue adjustment.

1 Press Copy key.


3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Hue

Adjustment].

4 Select the item for which the hue is to be adjusted and then press [ ] or [ ] to make the adjustment.

Ready to copy.

Hue Adjustment

Off

Place original.

All

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Yellow - Green

& Blue - Magenta

Green - Cyan

& Magenta - Red

Cyan - Blue

& Red - Yellow

Adjust hue for all colors.

Yellow

Red Green

Magenta Cyan

Blue

Cancel

Copies

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4

4-31

Yellow

Red

Magenta

Red

Magenta

Blue

Yellow

Blue

Green

Cyan

Green

Cyan

Copying Functions

Example 1

Select [Yellow - Green & Blue - Magenta], and press [ ] to adjust yellow closer to green, and blue closer to magenta.

Example 2

Select [Cyan - Blue & Red - Yellow], and press [ ] to adjust yellow closer to red , and blue closer to cyan.

5 Press [OK].


4-32

Copying Functions

One-touch Image Adjust

Adjust images as desired to more vivid or more dull images.

The items that may be configured are as follows: Vivid , Dull , Sharp , Smooth , Light , Dark

Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality for examples of the effect of each setting.


This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density (see page 3-8

).

This feature can not be used together with Color Balance Adjust (see

page 4-30 ).

Select from one of the 6 available One Touch Image Adjust types. Multiple selections are not possible.

Follow the steps below to use One-touch Image Adjust.

1 Press Copy key.

Ready to copy.

One-touch Image Adjust

Copies


3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Onetouch Image Adjust].

4 Select the image.

5 Press [OK].

Adjust images as desired.

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Off

Vivid

Smooth

Dull

Light

Cancel

Sharp

Dark

OK

10/10/2008 10:10


4

4-33

Copying Functions

Sharpness Adjust

Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire

* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen].

*

Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality .

Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.

Sharpness

Ready to copy.

Copies

1 Press Copy key.


3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then Press

[Sharpness].

4 Press [-3] to [3] ( Unsharpen - Sharpen ) to adjust the sharpness.

5 Press [OK].

Place original.

Unsharpen Sharpen

-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10


4-34

Copying Functions

Background Density Adjust

Lightens the background of color originals with dark backgrounds.

Original

Cancel

Copy

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. Background Density Adjust is disabled during auto color copying when the a black & white original has been detected.

Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.

1 Press Copy key.

Ready to copy.

Copies


3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press

[Background Density Adj.].

4 Press [On].

Background Density Adj.

Off

Background

Lighter Darker

On

Place original.

1 2 3 4 5

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

5 Press [1] to [5] ( Lighter - Darker ) to adjust the background color intensity.

6 Press [OK].


4

4-35

Copying Functions

Continuous Scan

When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you press [Scan Finish].

Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.

• Original size selection

• Original orientation

• Image quality selection

• Type of original (2-sided/book original)

• Zoom

• Border erase

• Density

• Color Selection

If you use Job Build, you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying.

The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.


Ready to copy.

Copies

2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous

Scan].

3 If Continuous Scan is selected, press [On].

Continuous Scan

Place original.

Off

On

Select desired binding orientation.

If Job Build is selected, press [Job Build] and select desired binding orientation.

4 Press [OK].

Job Build

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Binding

Left

Binding

Right

Cancel

Binding

Top

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Scan next original(s).

Place the originals and press Start key.

Press [Finish Scan] to start copying.

Scanner Setting

Original

Size

Original

Orientation

2-sided/Book

Original

Zoom

Original

Image

Border Erase

Copies

Finishing

㪈㪉 pages

Next Copy: On Front

1

5 Place the originals in the document processor or on the platen and press the Start key.

If [Job Build] is selected, the next page can be changed. Press [Sheet Insertion] to insert a blank paper. Press [Next Copy: On Back] in duplex copying to print the next page on back page.

Density

Status

1/2

Cancel

Next Copy:

On Back

Sheet

Insertion

Finish Scan

10/10/2008 10:10

6 Place the next original and press the Start key.

Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals.


4-36

Copying Functions

Auto Image Rotation

Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations are different. The images will be rotated 90° counter-clockwise prior to copying.

NOTE:

To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode, refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 8-22

.

The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below.



3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Auto Image

Rotation].

4 Press [On] to select Auto Image Rotation.

5 Press [OK].


Negative Image

Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.

NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.

Use the procedure below to make negative image copies.



3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Negative

Image].

4 Press [On] to select Negative Image.

5 Press [OK].


4

4-37

Copying Functions

Mirror Image

Copies the mirrored image of the original.

NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.

Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies.



3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Mirror Image].

4 Press [On] to select Mirror Image.

5 Press [OK].


4-38

Copying Functions

Job Finish Notice

Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.

NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Example of Job Finish Notice

To:

Subject:

Job No.:

Result: [email protected]

1234 Job end report mail

000002

OK

End Time:

File Name:

Job Type: Copy

------------------------------------------------

1234

Wed 27 Apr 2005 14:56:08 doc27042005145608

4

Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.


Ready to copy.

Job Finish Notice

Off

Address Book

Address

Entry

User A

Destination

[email protected]

Detail

Copies


3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice].

4 To select the destination from the address book, press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and then press [Address Book] in the next screen. Select the destination to be notified, then press [OK].

You can view information on the notification destination by pressing [Detail].

Address Book Detail

Status


10/10/2008 10:10

4-39

Ready to copy.

Job Finish Notice

Off

Address Book

E-mail

Address

Address

Entry

Status

Add Shortcut

Copies

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Copying Functions

To directly enter the E-mail address, press

[Address Entry]. Press [E-mail Address], enter the address and press [OK].

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key to start copying. Upon completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to the selected destination.

4-40

Copying Functions

File Name

Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here.

Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.


Ready to copy.

Copies


3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry].

4 Press [File Name], enter the name for a copy job, and press [OK].

File Name Entry

Add a file name.

Additional information such as Job No.

and Date and Time can also be set.

File Name doc

Additional Info

To add date and time, press [Date and Time]. To add job number, [Job No.]. Added information is displayed in Additional Info.

5 Press [OK].

Job No.

Job No.

Date and Time

Status


10/10/2008 10:10


Priority Override

Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying. The suspended job resumes after Priority

Override copying is finished.

NOTE: The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended.

The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.



3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Priority

Override].

4 Press [On] to select Priority Override.

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key. The current copy job is suspended and the copy job selected in Priority

Override starts. The suspended job resumes after

Priority Override copying is finished.

4

4-41

Copying Functions

Repeat Copy

Enable additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed. For confidential documents, you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct pass code must be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered.

IMPORTANT: A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off.

Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit.

Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is set to zero (refer to

Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4-43

).

You can select Repeat Copy as default setting. Refer to Repeat Copying on page 8-24

.

Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying (refer to

File Name on page

4-41 ).

Selecting Repeat Copy

Use the procedure below to select repeat copying.

Repeat Copy

Ready to copy.

Off

On

Place original.

Password(4digits)

Copies



3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Repeat Copy].

4 Press [On].

To register a password, press [# Keys] and enter a

4-digit password.

# Keys IMPORTANT: If you forget the pass code, Repeat Copy will be unavailable. Make a note of the pass code beforehand if necessary.

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key to start copying and register this job as a Repeat Copy job.

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs

The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box. Refer to Job Box on page 3-33

to print out the Repeat

Copy jobs.

4-42

Copying Functions

Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained

You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the document box.

Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained.


Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention

Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain.

Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.

2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and then [Next] of Job Box .

3 Press [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention .

4 Use the [+] or [-] key to enter the maximum retention number.

You can also enter the number from the numeric keys.

(0 - 50)

32 job(s) A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the number of retained jobs.

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use the Repeat Copy function.

5 Press [OK].

4

4-43

Copying Functions

OHP Backing Sheet Mode

When two or three OHP transparencies are stacked on top of each other, static electricity may make them difficult to handle. When using OHP Backing mode, a paper sheet is automatically inserted between each transparency, making them easier to handle. Also, the same original page can be copied to the backing sheet for multiple page copying.

NOTE: Never load OHP transparencies into trays or cassettes other than the multi purpose tray.

When OHP Backing mode is set, the multi purpose tray paper type is automatically set to Transparency .

If the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is installed, you may need to specify the output destination for finished copies. For further details, refer to

Output Destination on page 4-11

.

Blank Sheet

Outputs a blank backing sheet after copying to a transparency. (* denotes OHP film.)

1

2

3

1 *

2 *

3 *

Original

Copied Sheet

Copy

1

2

3

After copying to a transparency, copies the same original image to the backing sheet paper. (* denotes

OHP film.) 1 *

1

2 *

2

3 *

3

Original Copy

Follow the steps below for OHP Backing Sheet mode.

1 Press Copy key.

2 Place the original.

3 Load the transparencies into the multi purpose tray.

IMPORTANT: Fan through the transparencies before loading.

Up to 10 transparencies can be loaded at one time.

Be sure that paper of the same size and orientation as the transparencies is loaded in the cassette.

4-44

Ready to copy.

OHP Backing Sheet

Off

Place original.

Blank Sheet

Copied Sheet

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Copying Functions

Copies

Select the paper source to feed paper.

Auto

Cancel

A4

Plain

A3

Plain

A4

Plain

A4

Plain

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4 Press [Advanced Setup] and then Press [OHP

Backing Sheet].

5 Press [Blank Sheet] or [Copied Sheet].

6 Select the media to be fed. If you press [Auto], the machine automatically selects media that matches the size of the original.

7 Press [OK].


4

4-45

4-46

Copying Functions

5 Sending Functions

This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals.

•

Original Size Selection........................................................................5-2

•

Sending Size Selection .......................................................................5-3

•

Zoom...................................................................................................5-5

•

Centering ............................................................................................5-6

•

Mixed Size Originals ...........................................................................5-7

•

1-sided/2-sided Selection..................................................................5-10

•

Original Orientation ...........................................................................5-11

•

File Format........................................................................................5-12

•

File Separation..................................................................................5-13

•

PDF Encryption Functions ................................................................5-14

•

Image Quality....................................................................................5-16

•

Adjusting Density ..............................................................................5-17

•

Scan Resolution................................................................................5-18

•

Sharpness.........................................................................................5-19

•

Background Density Adjustment.......................................................5-20

•

Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection .................................5-21

•

Continuous Scan...............................................................................5-22

•

Border Erase.....................................................................................5-23

•

Enter Document Name/File Name ....................................................5-25

•

Enter E-mail Subject and Body .........................................................5-26

•

WSD Scan ........................................................................................5-27

•

Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................5-29

•

Send and Print ..................................................................................5-30

•

Send and Store .................................................................................5-30

•

FTP Encrypted TX ............................................................................5-31

•

Color Type.........................................................................................5-31

•

About Color Profiles ..........................................................................5-32

5-1

Sending Functions

Original Size Selection

Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size when using originals of nonstandard sizes.

Choose the original size from the following groups of original size.

Item Detail Size

Standard

Sizes 1

Select from automatic detection and standard sizes.

Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-

R, Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II-

R, 11×15"

Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-

R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio

Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5,

A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16 K, 16K-R

Standard

Sizes 2

Select from standard sizes except Standard

Sizes 1 .


Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II-R,

11×15", 8K, 16K, 16K-R

Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to 4 Others

Size Entry

*

**

Select from Hagaki and

Custom Original Size *.

Enter the size that is not indicated in Standard

Sizes 1 and 2**.

Inch models

Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments),

Vertical: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models

Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),

Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size (Custom 1 to 4), refer to

Custom

Original Size Setup on page 8-4

.

The input units can be changed in the System menu.

Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-11 .

Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.



3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then

[Original Size].

5-2

Sending Functions

Ready to send.

Place original.

Original Size

Standard

Sizes 1

Place original.

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Size Entry

Ready to send.

Place original.

Original Size

Standard

Sizes 1

Place original.

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Size Entry

X

Y

A6

B5

Auto

A4

Folio

B4

B6

A3

A5

Cancel

(50 - 432)

432 mm

# Keys

(50 - 297)

297 mm

# Keys

Cancel

B5

B6

A4

A5

Destination

1

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Destination

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4 Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2],

[Others], or [Size Entry] to select original size.

When you have selected [Size Entry], press [+] or

[-] to set the sizes of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).

By pressing [# Keys], you can use the numeric keys.

5 Press [OK].

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to start sending.

Sending Size Selection

Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).

The table below lists the sizes.

Item

Standard

Sizes 1

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Detail

Select from Same as Original Size or

Standard Size.

Select from standard size except Standard

Sizes 1.

Select from

Hagaki.

Size

Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger,

Legal, Letter, Statement, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II,

11×15"

Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, B4, A4,

B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio

Inch models: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio,

8K, 16K

Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement,

8.5×13.5",

Oficio II, 11×15", 8K, 16K

Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki

5

5-3

Sending Functions

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size

(page 5-2)

, Sending Size , and Zoom

(page 5-5)

are related to each other. Refer to the following table.

Original Size and the size you wish to send as are

Original Size

Sending Size

Zoom the same different

Specify as necessary

Select [Same as

Original]

Select [100%]

(or [Auto])

Specify as necessary

Select the required size

Select [Auto]

NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).

Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.

1 Press the Send Key.



[Sending Size].

Ready to send.

Place original.

Sending Size

Standard

Sizes 1

Place original.

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Same as

Original Size

A5

B5

A3

A6

B6

A4

B4

Destination

Folio

4 Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or

[Others] to select the sending size.

5 Press [OK].

Original

Zoom

Paper

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10


5-4

Sending Functions

Zoom

Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.

The table below lists the available options.

100%

Auto

Item Detail

No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)

Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size.

NOTE: When zooming in or out, see

Sending Size Selection on page 5-3

when selecting the sending size.

Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper.

To center the image vertically and horizontally on the page, use the centering setting described in

Centering on page 5-6

.

Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.



3 Select the transmission size.

Zoom

Ready to send.

Place original.

Destination

4 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Zoom].

5 Press [100%] or [Auto].

6 Press [OK].

Enlarge or reduce original when scanning.

[100%]: Scan at actual size.

[Auto]: Enlarge or reduce to match sending size/storing size.

Place original.

5

Original

Zoom

Send

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

100% Auto

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10


5-5

Sending Functions

Centering

When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these sizes, a margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the centering, the image is placed with a margin equally created at each of the page Top/Bottom and Left/Right.

Use the procedure below to center then image when sending a scanned image.



3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Centering].

4 Press [On]. Centering is performed.

5 Press [OK].


5-6

Sending Functions

Mixed Size Originals

Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent. In this operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.

Originals of the Same Width

When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.

• Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)

5

Ledger Letter

• Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)

Letter Ledger

Legal Letter-R

• B4 and B5

5-7

Sending Functions

Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only)

The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows.

NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio, A4-R, and B5-R, make sure to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On] for [Folio]. For more information, refer to

Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only) on page 8-9 .

• A3, B4, A4, B5

• B4, A4-R, B5

• Folio, A4-R, B5-R

5-8

Sending Functions

Use the procedure below to send mixed size originals as a batch.


2 Place the original into the document processor.

Ready to send.

Place original.


Place original.

Scan all sheets in the document processor, even if differently sized, then send.

*Up to 30 sheets can be placed in the document processor for mixed size originals.

Destination

IMPORTANT: When you place originals of different width, place the top edge of originals to align with the width guide at the backside. If the originals are placed unevenly, they may not be scanned correctly.


[Mixed Size Originals].

4 Select the combination of originals from

[Same Width] and [Different Width].

5 Press [OK].

5

Original

Zoom

Send

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Off Same Width Different

Width

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10


5-9

Sending Functions

1-sided/2-sided Selection

Select the type and binding of original depending on the original.

The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.

Original Type Binding

1-sided Sheet Original

2-sided Sheet Original

1-sided

2-sided*

—

Binding Left/Right,

Binding Top

Open Book Original such as magazine and book

*

Book Binding Left,

Binding Right

Only when the optional document processor is used.

Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.


Destination


3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then [2sided/Book Original].

4 Press [1-sided], [2-sided], or [Book].

Ready to send.

Place original.

2-sided/Book Original

1-sided

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Send

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

2-sided

Book

Left Right

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

5 When selecting [2-sided], select the binding direction and press [Original Orientation] to select the direction in which the original is set on the platen.

When selecting [Book], select the binding direction.

6 Press [OK].


08/08/2009 10:10 Status


5-10

Sending Functions


To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen.


• Border Erase

* If [On] is selected as the

Orientation Confirmation (page 8-15)

setting in the System Menu, the selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.

When placing the original on the platen

5

Original [Top Edge Top]

When placing the original on the optional document processor

[Top Edge Left]


Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.




[Original Orientation].

5-11

Ready to send.

Place original.


Select the orientation of the original document's top edge.

Place original.

Destination

Sending Functions

4 Select original orientation from [Top Edge Top] and

[Top Edge Left].

5 Press [OK].

Original

Zoom

Send

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Top Edge Top Top Edge Left

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10


File Format

Select the file format of the image to send.

The table below lists the file formats and their details.

File Format

PDF

TIFF

JPEG

XPS

High Comp.

PDF

Adjustable range of image quality

1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to

5 High Quality (Low Comp.)







1 Compression Ratio Priority to 3 Quality Priority

Color mode

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto

Color (Color/Black and White), Full

Color, Grayscale, Black and White



Color, Grayscale, Black and White

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full

Color, Grayscale

Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full

Color, Grayscale



Color, Grayscale

NOTE: In the color mode, when auto color (color/black and white) is selected, [JPEG] and [XPS] cannot be specified, and when black and white is selected, [JPEG], [High Comp. PDF], and [XPS] cannot be specified.

When [High Comp. PDF] is specified, you cannot adjust the image quality. In addition, when previewing the color of the image by selecting [High Comp. PDF], it may differ from the actual color.

You can use PDF encryption functions. For details, refer to the following PDF Encryption Functions .

5-12

Sending Functions

Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.


File Format

Ready to send.

Place original.

PDF

Image Quality

Destination



[File Format].

4 Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG],

[XPS], and [High Comp. PDF].

Place original.

TIFF

JPEG

Compression

Ratio Priority

Standard Quality

Priority

When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.

Original

Zoom

Send

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

XPS

High Comp.

PDF

Cancel

Off

Encryption

OK

08/08/2009 10:10

If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], press

[Encryption] and specify the encryption settings.

5 Press [OK].

Status


File Separation

Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.

Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.


Destination



[File Separation].

4 Press [Each Page] to set File Separation.

Ready to send.

Place original.

File Separation

Create and send a file for each page of the original that was read.

Place original.

5 Press [OK].

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key.

The scanned original is sent after being divided into files of one page each.

Original

Zoom

Send

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Off Each Page

Cancel

NOTE: Three-digit serial number such as abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of the file name.

Status

OK

08/08/2009 10:10

5

5-13

Sending Functions

PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.

The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.

Item

Compatibility

Value

Acrobat 4.0 or later,

Acrobat 5.0 or later

Off, On

Detail

Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file.

Enter the password to open the PDF file Password to

Open

Document

Password to

Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file

When you have entered the password to edit/print document, you can specifically limit the operation.

When you send a PDF file, use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission.



3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format], [File

Format], [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and

[Encryption].

File Format - Encryption

Compatibility Acrobat 4.0 and later

Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit)

Password to Open

Document

Off Password

On Confirmation

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off Password

4 Press [ ] of Compatibility , select Acrobat 4.0 and later or Acrobat 5.0 and later .

5 When you enter the password to open the PDF file, select [On] of Password to Open Document .

6 Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and then press [OK].

On Confirmation

Detail

OK

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

Cancel

NOTE: Refer to the

Character Entry Method on page

Appendix-7


7 Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again for confirmation. Then press [OK].

8 When you enter the password to edit the PDF file, select [On] of Password to Edit/Print Document .

9 In the same way as the entry of Password to Open

Document , enter the password to change the PDF file.

10 Press [Detail].

5-14

File Format - Detail

Printing Allowed

Changes Allowed

Not Allowed

Not Allowed

Copying of Text/Images/Others

Disable

Enable

Sending Functions

11 Restrict the access level of the PDF file. Press [ ] of Printing Allowed to select the item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Not Allowed

Allowed (Low Resolution only)*

Allowed

*

Make the printing of PDF file impossible

Can print the PDF file only in low resolution

Can print the PDF file in original resolution

Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility .

12 Press [ ] of Changes Allowed , and select the item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed differs according to the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in step 4.


Item Detail

Not Allowed

Commenting

Inserting/Deleting/

Rotating Pages*

Page Layout except extracting Pages**

Cannot change the PDF file

Can only add commenting

Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the

PDF file

Can change the page layout except extracting the pages of the PDF file

Any except extracting

Pages

*

**

Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of the PDF file

Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.

Only displayed when [Acrobat 4.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility .

13 From Copying of Text/Images/Others , select

[Disable] or [Enable].

5

5-15

Sending Functions


Disable

Enable

Item Detail

Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

Can copy text and objects on the PDF file.

14 Press [OK] three times to return to Original/

Sending Data Format .


Image Quality

Select image quality suitable to the type of original.

The table below shows the quality options.

Item Detail

Text+Photo

Photo

Text for OCR

*

Text and photos together.


Only text, no photos.

For documents to be read by OCR.*

This function is only available for black and white mode.

Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.


Ready to send.

Place original.

Original Image

Select original image type for best results.

[for OCR]: For documents to be read by OCR.

Place original.

Destination


3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Original

Image].

4 Select the original image.

5 Press [OK].

Text+Photo Photo Text

Original

Zoom

Send

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status for OCR

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10


5-16

Sending Functions

Adjusting Density

Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals.


Manual

Auto

Item Detail

Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.

Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original.

The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.


Ready to send.

Place original.

Destination


3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Density].

4 When selecting manual density adjustment, press

[-3] to [+3] ( Lighter - Darker ) to adjust density.

Density

Place original.

Auto

Lighter Normal Darker

When selecting auto density adjustment, press

[Auto].

5 Press [OK].

-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3

Original

Zoom

Send

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

-2.5

-1.5

-0.5

+0.5

+1.5

+2.5


08/08/2009 10:10 Status


5

5-17

Sending Functions

Scan Resolution

Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes), the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,

200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.

The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.


Ready to send.

Place original.

Scan Resolution

Select fineness of scanning resolution.

The larger the number, the better the image resolution.

Place original.

Destination

1


3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Scan

Resolution].

4 Select the resolution.

5 Press [OK].

600x600dpi 400x400dpi

Ultra Fine

300x300dpi

Original

Zoom

Send

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

200x400dpi

Super Fine

200x200dpi

Fine

Cancel

200x100dpi

Normal

OK

08/08/2009 10:10


5-18

Sending Functions

Sharpness

Select the sharpness of the image outline.


Item

Sharpen

Unsharpen

Detail

Emphasize the image outline. Make letters and lines appear sharper.

Blur the image outline. Can weaken a Moire effect (grids appearing as wavelike patterns when scanning printed photos).

Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images.



3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Sharpness].

Sharpness

Ready to send.

Place original.

Destination

4 Press [-3] to [+3] ( Unsharpen - Sharpen ) to adjust the sharpness.

5 Press [OK].

Place original.

Unsharpen Sharpen

-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3

Original

Zoom

Send

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10


5

5-19

Sending Functions

Background Density Adjustment

Lightens the background of the colored original when it is too dark.

NOTE: You cannot adjust the background density if you selected [Black & White] in Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection

(see page 5-21).

Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending scanned images.



3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Background

Density Adj.].

Ready to send.

Place original.

Background Density Adj.

Off

Background

Lighter

Destination

Darker

4 Press [On], and press [1] to [5] ( Lighter - Darker ) to adjust the background density.

5 Press [OK].

On Place original.

1 2 3 4 5

Original

Zoom

Send

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10


5-20

Sending Functions

Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection

This feature allows you to select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from

Auto (Color/Gray), Auto (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White.

Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.


Ready to send.

Place original.

Color Selection

Select scanning color.

Select [Auto Color] to automatically send color originals in full color and black & white originals in black & white.

Destination

Place original.


3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Color

Selection].

4 Select the color mode to be used for scanning.

5 Press [OK].

Auto Color

(Color/Gray)

Auto Color

(Color/B & W)

Original

Zoom

Send

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Full Color Grayscale

Cancel

Black & White

OK

08/08/2009 10:10


5

5-21

Sending Functions

Continuous Scan

When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after another until you press [Scan Finish].

Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.

• Original Size selection


• 1-sided / 2-sided selection

• Scan density

• Image quality

• Scan resolution

• Color selection

• Sending Size selection

• Zoom

• Border Erase

The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.


2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous

Scan].

Ready to send.

Place original.

Continuous Scan

Scan a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.

*Settings can be changed during scanning.

Place original.

Destination

3 Press [On]. Continuous Scan is selected.

4 Press [OK].

Original

Zoom

Send

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Off On

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10

5 Specify the destination.

6 Place the original, and press the Start key.

When the scanning is completed, change the settings as necessary.

7 Place the next original, and press the Start key.

Scan the remaining originals by the same procedure.

When you have scanned all the originals, press

[Finish Scan] to start sending.

5-22

Sending Functions

Border Erase

Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and sending originals. The following options can be selected.

Border Erase Sheet

Erases black borders around the single sheet original.

Original

Border Erase Book

Copy

Erases black borders around the edges and in the middle of the original such as a thick book. You can specify the widths individually to erase the borders around the edges and in the center of the book.

Original

Individual Border Erase

Copy

Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.

5

Original Copy

In each option, the available ranges are as below.

Input units

Inch models

Metric models

Border Erase Range

0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)

0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)

5-23

Sending Functions


When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table below shows the available settings.

Item

Same as Front

Page

Do Not Erase

Detail

Border Erase performed using the same setting as the front page

No Border Erase performed on the back page

Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals.


Ready to send.

Place original.

Border Erase

Off

Border (0 - 50)

6 mm

Destination


3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Border Erase].

4 Press [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase borders for a book.

Place original.

Border Erase

Sheet

Border Erase

Book

Individual

Border Erase

Gutter

# Keys

(0 - 50)

6 mm

Same as

Front Page

Back Page

Use [+] or [-] to enter the width in Border or Gutter .

Press [# Keys] to use the number keys for entry.

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview # Keys


10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Ready to send.

Place original.

Border Erase

Off

Place original.

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Border Erase

Sheet

Border Erase

Book

Individual

Border Erase

Top

Bottom

Left

Right

(0 - 50)

6 mm

6 mm

6 mm

6 mm

# Keys

Cancel

Destination

Same as

Front Page

Back Page

Top Edge Top

Original

Orientation

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the individual border erase.

Use [+] or [-] to enter the border width or press [#

Keys] and enter the width using the numeric keys.

Press [Original Orientation] to select the original orientation from either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge

Left], and press [OK].

For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].

5 Press [OK].


5-24

Sending Functions

Enter Document Name/File Name

This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the document name.

Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.


Destination


3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name

Entry].

4 Press [File Name].

Ready to send.

Place original.

File Name Entry

Add a file name.

Additional information such as Job No.

and Date and Time can also be set.

File Name doc

Additional Info

Date and Time Job No.

Status


08/08/2009 10:10

5 Enter the document name, and press [OK].

NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered for the document name.

6 Press [Job No.] to enter the job No., and [Date and

Time] to enter the date and time.

7 Press [OK].


5

5-25

Sending Functions

Enter E-mail Subject and Body

Ready to send.

Place original.

E-mail Subject/Body

Subject

Body

Place original.

Destination

1

When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the

E-mail.

Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.


2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [E-mail Subject/

Body].

3 Press [Subject].

Original

Zoom

Send

:

:

:

---

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10

4 Enter the subject, and press [OK].

NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the subject.

5 Press [Body].

6 Enter the body and press [OK].

NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the body.

7 Press [OK].


5-26

Sending Functions

WSD Scan

WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

NOTE: To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is networkconnected, and

WSD Scan Setup (page 8-76)

is set to On in the network settings. For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer’s help or the operation guide of your software.

Installing Driver Software (for Windows Vista)

1 Click Start and then Network in the computer.

2 Right-click the machine’s icon and then click

Install .

NOTE: If the User Account Control window appears, click Continue .

If the Found New Hardware window appears, click

Cancel .

3 During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the Driver Software

Installation screen. When Your devices are ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software

Installation screen, the installation is completed.

Procedure Using this machine





3 Press [WSD Scan].

4 Press [From Operation Panel] and press [Next].

5

5-27

WSD Scan - Selecting Computer

Select the destination computer and press [OK].

Computer Name pc00010 pc000102 pc000103 pc000104 pc000105

Reload

1/1

Detail

Sending Functions

5 Select the destination computer and press [OK].

Press [Reload] to reload the computer list.

You can view information on the selected computer by pressing [Detail].

Cancel Back OK

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

6 Select the type of originals, file format, etc., as necessary.

7 Press the Start key. Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.

Procedure Using WSD Scan from Your Computer


The send screen appears.



3 Press [WSD Scan].

4 Press [From Computer] and press [Execute].

5 Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.

5-28

Sending Functions

Job Finish Notice

Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed.

Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.


Ready to send.

Place original.

Job Finish Notice

Off

Destination


3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish

Notice].

4 To select the destination from the address book, press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and then press [Address Book] in the next screen.

Address Book Destination Detail

Select the destination to be notified, then press

[OK].

Address

Entry

Detail Address Book

You can view information on the notification destination by pressing [Detail].

Status


08/08/2009 10:10

Destination

5 Specify the destination to send the finish notice, and press [OK].

NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination from the Address Book, refer

Specifying Destination on page 3-30 .

6 To directly enter the address, press [Address Entry] and then [E-mail Address].

Ready to send.

Place original.

Job Finish Notice

Off

Address Book

E-mail

Address

Address

Entry

5

Status


08/08/2009 10:10

7 Enter the E-mail address, and press [OK].

8 Press [OK].


When the sending is completed, the finish notice is sent to the specified E-mail address.

5-29

Sending Functions

Send and Print

When you send originals, this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent.

The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below.



3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Send and Print].

4 Press [On].

5 Press [OK].

6 Specify the destination and press the Start key.

Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is printed.

Send and Store

When you send originals, this feature allows you to store a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.

The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below.


Ready to send.

Place original.

Send and Store

Off

Custom Box

On

No.

0006

0007

0008

0009

0010

Name

06 BOX001

07 BOX002

08 BOX003

09 BOX004

10 BOX005

Add Shortcut

Used Area

6%

4%

8%

4%

2%

2/2

Cancel

Destination

Detail


3 Press [Advanced Setup], [ ], and then [Send and

Store].

4 Press [On].

5 Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be stored.

If a password entry screen for the Custom Box appears, enter the password.

You can view information on the selected Custom

Box by pressing [Detail].

6 Press [OK].

Status

OK

08/08/2009 10:10

7 Specify the destination and press the Start key.

Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted document is stored in the specified Custom Box.

5-30

Sending Functions

FTP Encrypted TX

This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select the encryption method in the basic send screen.

Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.



3 Press [Advanced Setup], [ ], and then [FTP

Encrypted TX].

4 Press [On].

5 Press [OK].

NOTE: Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the

Embedded Web Server. Be sure that SSL of Secure

Protocol Settings is On and one or more effective encryption are selected in Clientside Settings . For details, refer to the Embedded Web Server Operation

Guide .

5

Color Type

This sets the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.

RGB sRGB

Item Detail

–

Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems.

Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.

1 Press System Menu key.

Send - Color Type

Specify the color type to send color images.

2 Press [Send] and [Change] of Color Type .

3 Select [RGB] or [sRGB].

4 Press [OK].

RGB

Profile:

RGB FINE 1 sRGB

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

5-31

Sending Functions

About Color Profiles

The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color.

NOTE: The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN/WIA-compliant software. Use the color profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN/WIA-complaint software.

Selecting a color profile compatible with this device

1 Select the color profile found in the CD included with this scanner CD (Product Library) under the

Color Profile folder.

NOTE: Use the indicated color profiles when you chose RGB in color type.

5-32

6 Document Box

This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box.

•

Using a Custom Box ...........................................................................6-2

•

Using a Job Box................................................................................6-12

•

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory..................6-20

•

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) .........................6-22

6-1

Document Box

Using a Custom Box

NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User

Logon privileges, refer to

User Privileges on page 3-40

.

Creating a New Custom Box

Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box.


Custom Box.

2 Press [Custom Box] and then [Register/Edit Box].

No.

0001

Name

SALES

Owner

Anonymous

Used Area

- - - -

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

1/1

Register/Edit

Box

Custom Box

Status

Job Box

Store File Detail

Removable Memory

Open

FAX Box

Box No

Item

Box Name

Box Password

08/08/2009 10:10

3 Press [Add].

4 Press [Change] for each item, enter the information and then press [OK].

The table below lists the items to be set.

Detail

Enter the box number by pressing [-, +] or number keys.

The box number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique number.

If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be automatically assigned.

Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.

Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-7


User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the box. Entering a password is not mandatory.

Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both [Password] and [Confirm Password].

6-2

Document Box

Item Detail

Usage Restriction

Auto File Deletion

To preserve the hard disk capacity, the storage capacity for a box can be restricted.

To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by pressing [-, +] or number keys.

You can enter a limit between 1 and 30,000. (Changes according to the number of created custom boxes.)

Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.

Press [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are stored.

You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day(s). To disable automatic file deletion, press [Off].

Overwrite Setting Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new documents are stored.

To overwrite old documents, press [Permit].

To retain old documents, press [Prohibit].

Delete after Printed Automatically delete document from the box once printing is complete. To delete the document, press [On]. To retain the document, press [Off].

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, "Owner"

and "Permission" are also displayed. Refer to Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled on page 3-41

.

5 Check the details you have entered and then press

[Register]. The Custom Box is created.

Setting the document deletion time

Sets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted.

The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below.


2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Custom Box , [Next] of Default Setting and then

[Change] of Auto File Deletion Time .

6

6-3

Document Box/Removable Memory - Auto File Deletion Time

Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.

Document Box

3 Set the time at which the document is deleted by pressing [+], [-]. Press [# Keys] to enter the time directly using the numeric keys.

4 Press [OK]. The time for document deletion is set.

Hour

21

# Keys

Minute

30

# Keys

Cancel

Status

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Storing Documents

The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below.


Custom Box.


3 Press [Custom Box], select the box where the document will be stored and then press [Store File].

No.

0001

Name

SALES

Owner

Anonymous

Used Area

- - - -

Search(Name)

Search(No.)

1/1

Register/Edit

Box

Custom Box

Status

Job Box

Store File Detail

Removable Memory

Open

FAX Box

08/08/2009 10:10

4 Select the type of originals, scanning density, etc., as necessary.

5 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box.

NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.

6-4

Document Box

Printing Documents

The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below.


2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the document you want to print and press [Open].

Box:

0001

0002

0003

File Name

0404200710574501

0404200710574511

0404200710574521

Print

Status

Send Join

Date and Time Size

10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB

10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1

Search(Name)

Move/Copy Delete

Detail

Preview

Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10


3 Select the document you wish to print by checking the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

4 Press [Print].

5 Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired.

6 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected document begins.

6

6-5

Document Box

Sending Documents

The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below.


2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the document you want to send and press [Open].

Box:

0001

0002

0003

File Name

0404200710574501

0404200710574511

0404200710574521

Print

Status

Send Join

Date and Time Size

10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB

10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1

Search(Name)

Move/Copy Delete

Detail

Preview

Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10


3 Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox.


NOTE: You cannot select and send multiple documents.

To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

4 Press [Send].

The screen for sending appears.

NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear.

5 Set the destination.

NOTE: For more information on selecting destinations, refer to

Specifying Destination on page 3-30 .

6 Press the Start key. Sending of the selected document begins.

6-6

Document Box

Form Overlay from Custom Boxes

This function allows you to retrieve images (image files), overlay them into documents stored in custom boxes and then print the results.



2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the document you want to overlay the image into and print, and then press [Open].


3 Select the document you wish to print by checking the checkbox.


Box:

0001

0002

0003

File Name

0404200710574501

0404200710574511

0404200710574521

Print Send Join

Status

Ready to store in Box.

File Name:

Form Overlay

Density

Off

Place original.

Select

Stored Form

Date and Time Size

10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB

10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1

Search(Name)

Move/Copy Delete

Detail

Preview

Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10

(10 㵨 30, 100)

100

%

Copies

1


4 Press [Print].

5 Press [Functions], [Form Overlay], [Select Stored

Form], and then [Select Form].

NOTE: You can select the form density setting through

4 levels from 10%, 20%, 30% or 100%. Press the [+] or

[-] buttons in Density .

Original

Zoom

Paper

: ---

:

:

100%

---

Preview

Add Shortcut

Status

Cancel

Off

Select

Form

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

6 In Form Overlay - Select Form , select the image file to be overlaid onto the document from the displayed document boxes.

You can only select one image file.

7 Press [OK].

8 Press [OK] again to return to the Functions screen.

9 Press the Start key. Printing begins.

6

6-7

Document Box

Editing Documents

This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple documents together. You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this machine.

Moving a Document / Copying a Document

The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below.


2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the document you want to move or copy and press

[Open].


3 Select the document in the list that you want to move or copy by pressing the checkbox.


Box:

0001

0002

0003

File Name

0404200710574501

0404200710574511

0404200710574521

Print Send Join

Status

Custom Box.

Move/Copy

Select the required operation and press [Next].

Date and Time Size

10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB

10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1

Search(Name)

Move/Copy Delete

Detail

Preview

Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10


4 Press [Move/Copy].

5 To move the document, press [Move to Custom

Box].

To copy the document, press [Copy to Custom Box] or [Copy to Removable Mem.].

6 Press [Next].

Copy to

Custom Box

Move to

Custom Box

Copy to

Removable Mem.

Cancel Back Next

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

6-8

Document Box

Job Box.

0001

0002

0003

0004

Move to Custom Box

Select the destination box and press [Move].

No.

Document

Name Owner

Document1

Document2

Document3

Document4

Administrator

Administrator

Administrator

Administrator

Cancel

Status

Used Area

2 MB

3 MB

3 MB

5 MB

Back

Up

Open

Move

08/08/2009 10:10

7 To copy or move the document to a custom box, select the destination box.

To copy the document to USB memory, select the destination folder and press [Next]. If necessary, set the saved file size and the file format, etc.

8 Press [Move] or [Copy] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The selected document is moved or copied.

NOTE: If the box to which the document is to be moved or copied is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

Joining Documents

The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below.

NOTE: You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the documents to be joined beforehand.


2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the documents you want to join and press [Open].

Box:

0001

0002

0003

File Name

0404200710574501

0404200710574511

0404200710574521

Print

Status

Send Join

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:40

Size

21 MB

10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1

Search(Name)

Detail

Move/Copy Delete

Preview

Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10


3 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by pressing the checkbox.


You can join up to 10 documents.


4 Press [Join].

6

6-9

Join

Confirm the order of documents to combine.

File Name

2008101010574501

2008101010574511

2008101010574521

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:40

10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 10:10

Size

21 MB

21 MB

21 MB 1/1

Up

Down

Status

Cancel Next

08/08/2009 10:10

Document Box

5 Arrange the documents into the order in which they are to be joined.

Highlight the document you want to rearrange and press [Up] or [Down] to move it to the correct place in the sequence.

6 Press [Next].

7 Press [File Name], enter the file name for the joined document and press [OK].

NOTE: Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.

8 Press [Join] and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The documents are joined.

NOTE: After joining, the original documents are left unchanged. Delete the documents if they are no longer needed.

6-10

Document Box

Deleting Documents

The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below.


2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the document you want to delete and press [Open].

Box:

0001

0002

0003

File Name

0404200710574501

0404200710574511

0404200710574521

Print

Status

Send Join

Date and Time Size

10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB

10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1

Search(Name)

Move/Copy Delete

Detail

Preview

Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10


3 Select the document you wish to delete by checking the checkbox.


NOTE: [Delete] is disabled until a document is selected.

To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

4 Press [Delete]. The delete confirmation screen appears.

5 Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.

6

6-11

Document Box

Using a Job Box

Private Print/Stored Job Box

Private Print/Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print/

Stored Job.

Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver .

Printing a Document in Private Print/Stored Job Box

You can print documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.

Use the procedure below to print a document.

Job Box.


2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].

4 Select the creator of the document to print and press [Open].

Private Print/Stored Job

1 User

2 User

3 User

4 User

5 User

User Name Files

5

2

1

1

1

Open

1/2

Close

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

Job Box.

5 Select the document and press [Print].

User:

Print

File Name

1 File

2 File

3 File

4 File

5 File

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:40

10/10/2008 09:45

Size

21 MB

30 MB

36 MB 10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 09:55

10/10/2008 10:00

21 MB

30 MB

1/1

Delete

Detail

Close

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

6 If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys.

7 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

8 Press [Start Print] to start printing.

Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.

6-12

Document Box

Deleting a Document

You can delete documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.

Use the procedure below to delete a document.

Job Box.


2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].

4 Select the creator of the document and press

[Open].


1 User

2 User

3 User

4 User

5 User

User Name Files

5

2

1

1

1

Open

1/2

Close

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

User:

Print

Job Box.

File Name

1 File

2 File

3 File

4 File

5 File

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:40

10/10/2008 09:45

10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 09:55

Size

21 MB

30 MB

36 MB

21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB

1/1

Delete

Detail

Close

08/08/2009 10:10

5 To delete the document, select the document and press [Delete].

When the delete confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].

If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys and the document is deleted.

Status

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job.

Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job using the printer driver .

Setting the Number of Stored Jobs

To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs.


2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box , then [Change] of Quick Copy Job

Retention .

6

6-13

Document Box

Document Box/Removable Memory - Quick Copy Job Retention

Set the maximum number of quick copy/proof print jobs to retain.



3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the maximum number of stored jobs. You can enter any number between 0 and 50.

You can also enter the number using the numeric keys. (0 - 50)

32 job(s)

NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use the Repeat Copy function.

Cancel

Status

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4 Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is set.

Printing a Document

You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.


Job Box.

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold


2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] and press

[Open].


[Open].

1 User

2 User

3 User

4 User

5 User

User Name Files

5

2

1

1

1

Open

1/2

Close

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

Job Box.

5 Select the document to print, and press [Print].

User:

Print

File Name

1 File

2 File

3 File

4 File

5 File

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:40

10/10/2008 09:45

10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 09:55

Size

21 MB

30 MB

36 MB

21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB

1/1

Delete

Detail

Close

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

6 Specify the number of prints as desired.


6-14

Document Box

Deleting a Document

You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.

Use the procedure below to delete a document.

Job Box.



2 Press [Job Box], [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold], then

[Open].


[Open].

1 User

2 User

3 User

4 User

5 User

User Name Files

5

2

1

1

1

Open

1/2

Close

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

User:

Job Box.

4 Select the document to delete and press [Delete].

The delete confirmation screen appears.

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:40

10/10/2008 09:45

10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 09:55

Size

21 MB

30 MB

36 MB

21 MB

10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB

1/1

Delete

Detail

Print

File Name

1 File

2 File

3 File

4 File

5 File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10 Status

5 Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.

Repeat Copy Box

Setting the Number of Stored Jobs

To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs.


2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box , [Change] of Repeat Copy Job

Retention .

6

6-15

Document Box

Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention

Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain.



3 Use the [+] and [–] keys or the numeric keys to enter the maximum number of stored jobs.

You can enter any number between 0 and 50.

(0 - 50)

32 job(s)

NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), no jobs are stored.

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4 Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is set.

Status

Printing a Document

You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box.



2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Repeat Copy] box, and press [Open].

4 Select the document to print and press [Print].

Job Box.

Repeat Copy

Name

1010200800101002

Date and Time

10/10/2008 10:00

Size

21 MB

1/1

Detail

Print

Status

Delete

Close

08/08/2009 10:10

5 If the document is protected by a password, enter the password using the numeric keys.


The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the main power switch is turned off.

6-16

Document Box

Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents

This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.


Off

1 hour

4 hours

1 day

1 week

Item Detail

Temporary documents are not automatically deleted. However, the temporary documents will be deleted when the power is turned off.

Documents are deleted after 1 hour.

Documents are deleted after 4 hours.

Documents are deleted after 1 day.

Documents are deleted after 1 week.

Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents.


2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box , then [Change] of Deletion of Job Retention .

3 Select the time for automatic deletion.

To deactivate automatic deletion, press [Off].

4 Press [OK].

NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.

6

Form for Form Overlay Box

Storing a Form

You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the Form for Form Overlay box. You can store a 1-page form.

Use the procedure below to store a form.


2 Place the original in the document processor or on the platen.

3 Press [Job Box].

6-17

Document Box

4 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].

Job Box.



Repeat Copy


Name Files

21

21

21

21

Open

Custom Box

Status


Name

1010200809530900

1010200800530910

1010200800530920

Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:00

10/10/2008 09:10

10/10/2008 09:20

Size

21 MB

30 MB

30 MB

1/1

08/08/2009 10:10

Detail

5 Press [Store File].

Print

Status

Delete Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10

6 If necessary, select the image quality of original, scanning density, etc. before the original is scanned.

7 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.

NOTE: For information on using image overlays with a stored form, see

Form Overlay on page 4-22

and Form

Overlay from Custom Boxes on page 6-7 .

Deleting a Form Stored

You can delete the form stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.

Use the procedure below to delete a form.


2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].

6-18


Name

1010200809530900

1010200800530910

1010200800530920

Print

Status

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:00

10/10/2008 09:10

10/10/2008 09:20

Size

21 MB

30 MB

30 MB

1/1

Detail

Delete Store File

Close

08/08/2009 10:10

Document Box

4 Select the form to delete and press [Delete].

The delete confirmation screen appears.

5 Press [Yes]. The form is deleted.

6

6-19

Document Box

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the

USB memory without having to use a computer.

Limitations

• The following file types can be printed:

• PDF file (Version 1.5)

• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)

• JPEG file

• XPS file

• Encrypted PDF file

• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).

• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.

• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.

• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory printing is error free if a USB hub is used.

Printing

Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.

1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot

(A1).

IMPORTANT: Use USB memory formatted by this machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other device is used, The removable memory is not formatted . may appear. To format a USB memory, press [Format] and follow the instructions on the screen.

2 When the machine reads the USB memory,

Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.

may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable memory screen.

NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the

Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].

3 Select the folder containing the file to be printed and press [Open].

The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

NOTE: To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].

6-20

Document Box

Removable Memory.

Print

Removable Memory

Name

1 Document

2 Document

3 Document

4 Document

5 Document

Job Box

Delete

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:30

10/10/2008 09:40

10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 10:00

10/10/2008 10:05

Detail

Removable Memory Custom Box

Status

Size

1 MB

3 MB

4 MB

1 MB

2 MB

Open

001/999

Up

Memory

Information

Remove

Memory

Store File

FAX Box

08/08/2009 10:10

4 Select the file to be printed and press [Print].

5 Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.

6 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file begins.

6

Removing USB Memory

Remove the USB memory.

IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

Removable Memory.


2 Press [Removable Memory].

3 Press [Remove Memory].

Print

Removable Memory

Name

1 Document

2 Document

3 Document

4 Document

5 Document

Job Box

Delete

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:30

10/10/2008 09:40

10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 10:00

10/10/2008 10:05

Detail


Status

Size

1 MB

3 MB

4 MB

1 MB

2 MB

Open

001/999

Up

Memory

Information

Remove

Memory

Store File

FAX Box

08/08/2009 10:10

4 Remove the USB memory after Removable

Memory can be safely removed.

is displayed.

6-21

Document Box

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high-compression PDF format.

NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100.

Storing Documents

The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.

1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot

(A1).

IMPORTANT: Use only USB memory that has been formatted on this machine. If USB memory formatted on another device is used, The removable memory is not formatted message may appear. To format the USB memory, press [Format].

Removable Memory.

Print

Removable Memory

Name

1 Document

2 Document

3 Document

4 Document

5 Document

Job Box

Delete

Date and Time

10/10/2008 09:30

10/10/2008 09:40

10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 10:00

10/10/2008 10:05

Detail


Status

Size

1 MB

3 MB

4 MB

1 MB

2 MB

001/999

Open

Up

Memory

Information

Remove

Memory

Store File

FAX Box

08/08/2009 10:10

2 When the machine reads the USB memory,

Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.

may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable memory screen.

NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the

Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].

3 Select the folder where the file will be stored and press [Open].

The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

4 Press [Store File].

5 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

6 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.

6-22

7 Status / Job Cancel

This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication.

•

Checking Job Status ...........................................................................7-2

•

Checking Job History ..........................................................................7-9

•

Sending the Log History....................................................................7-11

•

Pause and Resumption of Jobs ........................................................7-13

•

Canceling of Jobs .............................................................................7-13

•

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs .....................................................7-14

•

Reordering Print Jobs .......................................................................7-14

•

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper......................7-15

•

Device/Communication .....................................................................7-16

7-1

Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens

- Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Sending Jobs - Timer waiting, and Storing Jobs. The following job statuses are available.

Screen

Printing Jobs

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Job statuses to be displayed

• Copy

• Printer

• FAX reception

• i-FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Job Report /List

• Printing data from removable memory

• FAX transmission

• i-FAX transmission

• PC (SMB/FTP) transmission

• E-mail

• Application

• Multiple destination

• Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission

• Scan

• FAX

• i-FAX

• Printer

• Join Box Document

• Copy Box Document

Displaying Status Screens

Use the procedure below to display the Status screen.

Status

Status

All

Scheduled Job

Job Type

Job No.

Accepted Time Type

438 14:47

Job Name [email protected]

User Name

Log

Status

InProcess

1/1

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

2 The Status screen appears. Press either of

[Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing Jobs] to check the status.

To check the scheduled transmission job, press

[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].

For an explanation of the screen, refer to

Details of the Status Screens on page 7-3

.

Cancel Detail

Printing Jobs

Status

Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/

Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

7-2


Details of the Status Screens

The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows.

For information on how to display the Status screen, see Displaying Status Screens on page 7-2

.

Printing Jobs Status Screen

Status

Status

Job Type All

7

Job Name Job No.

End Date

000001 10/10 09:50

Type doc10102008095050

Log

000002 10/10 09:55 doc10102008095510

000003

1

10/10 10:00

2 3

8 9 doc10102008091000

4

10

Pause All

Print Jobs

Cancel Priority

Override

Printing Jobs

Status

Sending Jobs Storing Jobs

User Name

AAAAA

AAAAA

AAAAA

5

11

Move Up

Result

InProcess

Waiting

Waiting

6

12

Detail

Device/

Communication

1/1

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen.

No.

1

2

3

Item / Key

Job No.

Accepted Time

Type

4

5

6

Job Name

User Name

Status

Detail

Acceptance No. of job

Accepted Time of job

Icons that indicate the job type

 Copy job

 Printer job

 FAX reception

 i-FAX reception

 E-mail reception

 Job from Document Box

 Report / List

 Data from Removable Memory

Job Name or file name

User Name for the executed job

Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to print.

Printing:

Waiting:

Printing

Print Waiting

Pause: Pausing print job or error

Canceling: Canceling the job

7

7-3


No.

7

8

Item / Key

[ ] of Job Type

[Pause All Print Jobs]

9 [Cancel]

10 [Priority Override]

11 [Move Up]

12 [Detail]

Detail

Sorts by specific type of job

Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing jobs will be resumed.

Select the job to be canceled from the list, and press this key.

Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.

(Refer to

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 7-14 )

In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job queue and press this key.

(Refer to

Reordering Print Jobs on page 7-14 )

Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list, and

press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of

Histories on page 7-10 )

7-4


Sending Jobs Status screen

Status

Job Type

Status

All

Scheduled Job

7

Job Name Job No.

Accepted Time Type

438 14:47

1 2 3 [email protected]

4

User Name

5

Log

Status

InProcess

6

1/1

Cancel

8

Detail

9

Printing Jobs

Status


Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen.

No.

1

2

3

Item / Key

Job No.

Accepted Time

Type

4

5

6

7

8

9

[

Destination

User Name

Status

] of Job Type

[Cancel]

[Detail]

Detail




 Sending Job FAX

 Sending Job i-FAX

 Sending Job PC (SMB/FTP)

 Sending Job E-mail

 Sending Job Application

 Sending Job Multiple

Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address, or server name)


Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during

Sending:

Waiting: scanning originals

Sending

Sending Waiting


Pause: Pausing the job

Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.

Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from

the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed

Information of Histories on page 7-10 )

7

7-5


Storing Jobs Status screen

Status

Status

Job Type All

Job No.

Accepted Time Type

438

1

7

Job Name

14:47

2 3 doc20070225144758

4

Log

User Name

5

Status

InProcess

6

1/1

Cancel

8

Detail

9

Printing Jobs

Status


Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.

No.

1

2

3

Display / Key

Job No.

Accepted Time

Type

4

5

6

7

8

9

[

Job Name

User Name

Status

] of Job Type

[Cancel]

[Detail]

Details




 Storing Job Scan

 Storing Job Printer

 Storing Job FAX

 Storing Job i-FAX

 Join Box Document

 Copy Box Document

Job name or file name is displayed.


Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during

Storing: scanning originals

Storing Data


Pause: Pausing the job

Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.

Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from

the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed

Information of Histories on page 7-10 )

7-6


Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs

Check the detailed information of each job.

Use the procedure below to check a job's information.

Status

Status Scheduled Job

Job Type All

Job No.

Accepted Time Type

438 14:47

Job Name [email protected]

User Name

Log

Status

InProcess


2 Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing

Jobs].

To check the scheduled transmission, press

[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].

3 Select the job whose details you wish to check from the list, and press [Detail].

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

1/1

7

Cancel

Printing Jobs

Status


Detail

Device/

Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

Detail Job No.:

Job No.:

000080

Job Type:

000080

Sending Job - E-mail

User Name:

User1

Job Name: doc20070404115151

Accepted Time:

10:10:10

Status/Destination:

Processing

Destination:

ABCDE

Detail

1/2

Close

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Detail Job No.:

Job No.:

000080

000080

Job Type:

Sending Job - E-mail

User Name:

User1

Job Name: doc20070404115151

Accepted Time:

10:10:10

Status/Destination:

Processing

Destination:

ABCDE

Detail

Status

1/2

Close

10/10/2008 10:10

Use [ ] or [ information.

] to see the next or previous page of

In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by pressing [Detail] in Status/Destination .

7-7

Detail Job No.: 000081

Job Type

Type

All

Destination doc20070404131415

User01

Status

Sending

Waiting

1/2

Detail

Status

Close

10/10/2008 10:10


Status/Destination is displayed when address is selected. Press [Detail] to display the list.

Press [ ] or [ ], select a destination and press

[Detail]. Information on the selected job is displayed for checking.

4 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].

7-8


Checking Job History

Check the history of completed jobs.

NOTE: Job history is also available by Embedded Web Server or Network Print Monitor from the computer.

Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The following job histories are available.

Screen

Printing Jobs

Sending Jobs

Storing Jobs

Job histories to be displayed

• Copy

• Printer

• FAX reception

• i-FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Job Report / List

• Printing data from removable memory

• FAX

• i-FAX

• PC (SMB/FTP)

• E-mail

• Application

• Multiple destination

• Scan

• FAX

• i-FAX

• Printer

• Join Box Document

• Copy Box Document

Displaying Job History Screen

The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below.


2 Press either of [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or

[Storing Jobs] to check the log, and press [Log].

Status

Status

Job Type All

Job No.

End Date

000080 01/25 14:14

Type Job Name doc20070225141427

Log

000081 01/25 14:22

000082 01/25 14:23 doc20070225142253 doc20070225142310

000083 01/25 14:24

000084 01/25 14:30 doc20070225142458 doc20070225143034

User Name Result

Completed

Completed

Completed

Error

Completed

001/001

Detail

Printing Jobs

Status


Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

7

7-9


Checking the Detailed Information of Histories

Check the detailed information of each history.

Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history

Use the procedure below to check the job finish history.


2 Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs] or [Storing

Jobs] and then [Log].

3 Select the job to check details from the list, and press [Detail].

Status

Status

Job Type All

Job No.

End Date

000080 01/25 14:14


Log

000081 01/25 14:22

000082 01/25 14:23

000083 01/25 14:24 doc20070225142253 doc20070225142310 doc20070225142458

000084 01/25 14:30 doc20070225143034

User Name Result

Completed

Completed

Completed

Error

Completed

001/001

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

NOTE: To check the information of the next/previous page, press [ ] or [ ].

Detail

Printing Jobs

Status


Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

4 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].

7-10


Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Setting the Destination

Set the destination to which log histories are sent.

Use the procedure below to set the destination.


2 Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Change] of Destination .

3 To enter a new e-mail address, press [E-mail

Address Entry].

Press [E-mail Address], enter the destination email address and then press [OK].

4 To set an address from the address book, press [Email Address Book].

Press [Address Book]. Select the destination from the address book and press [OK].

NOTE: For information on specifying destinations,

refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-30 .

The selected e-mail addresses is displayed.

NOTE: You can view information on the selected destinations by pressing [Detail].

5 Press [OK].

Automatic Log History Transmission

This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged.

Use the procedure below to set automatic log history transmission.


2 Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Change] of Auto Sending .

7

7-11

3 Press [On] and enter the number of jobs in the log history print by using [+]/[-] or the numeric keys.

You can enter any number between 1 and 1500.

4 Press [OK].


Report - Auto Sending

Send job log history to the specified destination after a set number of jobs have been logged.

Jobs

Off

On

(1 - 1500)

100

Cancel

Status

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Manual Log History Transmission

You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.

Use the procedure below to send the log history manually.


2 Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Execute] of Send Log History .

When the confirmation screen appears, press

[Yes]. The log history is sent.

Setting E-mail Subject

Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by e-mail.

Use the procedure below to set the subject.


2 Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and then [Change] of Job Log Subject .

3 Enter an e-mail subject not more than 60 characters.

NOTE: Refer to the

Character Entry Method

on

Appendix-7


4 Check that the entry is correct and press [OK].

7-12


Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.


2 Press [Pause All Print Jobs] on the Printing Jobs

Status screen. Printing is paused.

Status

Status

Job Type All

Job No.

End Date

000001 10/10 09:50


Log

000002 10/10 09:55

000003 10/10 10:00 doc10102008095510 doc10102008091000

User Name

AAAAA

AAAAA

AAAAA

Result

InProcess

Waiting

Waiting 1/1

Pause All

Print Jobs

Printing Jobs

Status

Cancel

Sending Jobs

Priority

Override

Storing Jobs

Move Up Detail

Device/

Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

3 When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, press [Resume All Print Jobs].

Canceling of Jobs

For more information on canceling jobs, refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3-42

.

7

7-13


Priority Override for Waiting Jobs

Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.

The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.


2 Press [Printing Jobs].

3 Select the job to be given priority, and press

[Priority Override].

Status

Status

Job Type All

Job No.

End Date

000001 10/10 09:50


Log

000002 10/10 09:55

000003 10/10 10:00 doc10102008095510 doc10102008091000

User Name

AAAAA

AAAAA

AAAAA

Result

InProcess

Waiting

Waiting 1/1

Pause All

Print Jobs

Printing Jobs

Status

Cancel

Sending Jobs

Priority

Override

Storing Jobs

Move Up Detail

Device/

Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

4 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The current job in printing is suspended, and the job for override printing starts.

5 When the Priority Override is completed, the printing job that has been suspended will be resumed.

Reordering Print Jobs

This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.

The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Cancel key.

Status

Status

All Job Type

Job No.

End Date

000001 10/10 09:50


Log

000002

000003

10/10 09:55

10/10 10:00 doc10102008095510 doc10102008091000

User Name

AAAAA

AAAAA

AAAAA

Result

InProcess

Waiting

Waiting 1/1

2 Press the [Printing Jobs].

3 Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and press [Move Up].

The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 .

To further raise the job's priority, press [Move Up] again. Each time you press [Move Up], the priority increases by 1.

Pause All

Print Jobs

Printing Jobs

Status

Cancel

Sending Jobs

Priority

Override

Storing Jobs

Move Up Detail

Device/

Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

7-14


Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper

Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel.

Use the procedure below to check the remaining amounts.


Status

2 Press [Paper/Supplies].Check the remaining amount of toner and the status of a waste toner box in Toner Information , and the remaining amount of paper in each paper source in Paper.

Toner Information

Toner

Black (K)

Status

100%

100% Cyan (C)

Magenta (M)

Yellow (Y)

Waste Toner OK

100%

100%

Paper

A3

A3

A4

A4

A4

Size Type

Plain

Plain

Plain

Plain

Plain

Status

30%

30%

30%

30%

0%

Others

Type

Staple A OK

Status

Printing Jobs

Status


Communication

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

The items you can check are described below.

Remaining amount of toner

You can check the remaining amount of each color toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0%.

Status of waste toner box

You can check the status of waste toner box.

Paper

You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper source.The remaining amount of paper is shown by 11 levels from 100 to 0%, however, the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown by 2 levels as 100% and 0%.

Others

You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.

NOTE: If the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are installed, the

Others section provides the status of the punch waste box and whether or not staples are available.

7

7-15


Device/Communication

Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control devices depending on their status.

Displaying Device/Communication Screen

The procedure for using the Device/Communication screen is explained below.


2 Press [Device/Communication].

The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.

Check of Device Status

Status

Scanner

Ready.

Printer

Ready.

Removable Memory

Not connected.

Format

FAX Port 1

Dialing...

Remove

Line Off Manual RX

FAX

Printing Jobs

Status

Log


Hard Disk

Overwriting...

䊜䊝䊥䉦䊷䊄

FAX Port 2

Receiving...

Line Off i-FAX

Device/

Communication

Check New FAX

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

The items you can check are described below.

Scanner

The status of an original scanning in the document processor (optional) or the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is displayed.

Printer

Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or printing are displayed.

Hard Disk

The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error occurrence is displayed.

7-16


Configuring the Devices

Status

Scanner

Ready.

Printer

Ready.

Removable Memory

Not connected.

Format

FAX Port 1

Dialing...

Line Off

Remove

Manual RX

FAX

Printing Jobs

Status

Log


Hard Disk

Overwriting...

䊜䊝䊥䉦䊷䊄

FAX Port 2

Receiving...

Line Off i-FAX

Device/

Communication

Check New FAX

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

Detailed information on controlling devices is given below.

Removable Memory (USB Memory)

• The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.

• Press [Format] to format external media.

• Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. For details, refer to Removing the USB Memory in the

next section.

FAX Port 1 , FAX Port 2

• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.

• Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving. For details, refer to

Canceling FAX Communication on page 7-18 in the section afterwards.

• Press [Manual RX] to start a fax. Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the fax originals. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit .

• Press [Log] to display the fax transmission history. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit .

Removing the USB Memory

There is a way to remove the USB memory safely.

Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory.

Hard Disk

Overwriting...


2 Press [Device/Communication] > [Remove] in

Removable Memory .

Status

Scanner

Ready.

Printer

Ready.

Removable Memory

Not connected.

Format Remove

FAX Port 1

Dialing...

Line Off Manual RX

FAX

Printing Jobs

Status

Log


䊜䊝䊥䉦䊷䊄

FAX Port 2

Receiving...

Line Off i-FAX

Device/

Communication

Check New FAX

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

3 When Removable memory can be safely removed. is displayed, remove the USB memory.

7-17

7


Canceling FAX Communication

Cancel fax communication.

Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication.


Hard Disk

Overwriting...

2 Press [Device/Communication] > [Line Off] in FAX

Port 1 or FAX Port 2 .

Status

Scanner

Ready.

Printer

Ready.

Removable Memory

Not connected.

Format

FAX Port 1

Dialing...

Line Off

Remove

Manual RX

䊜䊝䊥䉦䊷䊄

FAX Port 2

Receiving...

Line Off

FAX

Printing Jobs

Status

Log

Sending Jobs Storing Jobs i-FAX

Device/

Communication

Check New FAX

Paper/Supplies

10/10/2008 10:10

3 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The line is disconnected, and the fax communication is canceled.

7-18

8 Default Setting (System Menu)

This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on the operation panel.

•

Common Settings ...............................................................................8-2

•

Copy Settings....................................................................................8-27

•

Sending Settings...............................................................................8-30

•

Document Box Settings ....................................................................8-33

•

Printer Settings .................................................................................8-35

•

Printing Reports/Sending Notice.......................................................8-41

•

Adjustment/Maintenance ..................................................................8-44

•

Date/Timer ........................................................................................8-55

•

Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)...........8-60

•

Internet Browser Setup .....................................................................8-67

•

Applications.......................................................................................8-69

•

System Initialization ..........................................................................8-72

•

Restarting the System.......................................................................8-72

•

Network Setup ..................................................................................8-73

•

Interface Block Setting ......................................................................8-80

•

Security Level (Security Level setting)..............................................8-81

•

Document Guard Setting ..................................................................8-81

•

Optional Functions ............................................................................8-83

•

Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) ......................8-84

8-1

Default Setting (System Menu)

Common Settings

Common settings include;

• Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-2

• Default Screen …8-2

• Sound …8-3

• Original/Paper Settings …8-4

• Switching Unit of Measurement …8-11

• Error Handling …8-12

• Paper Output …8-14

• Orientation Confirmation …8-15

• Settings for Color Toner Empty Action …8-15

• Function Defaults …8-15

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

Switching the Language for Display [Language]

Select the language displayed on the touch panel.

Use the procedure below to select the language.


2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language.

3 Press the key for the language you want to use.

4 Press [OK].

The touch panel language will be changed.

Default Screen

Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows.

The table below lists the available screens.

Copy

Send

Status


The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed) appears.

The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed) appears.

The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/

Job Cancel key is pressed) appears.

8-2


Document Box

Item

Program

Application

Accessibility Copy

Accessibility Send

Description

The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document

Box key is pressed) appears.

The Program screen (the screen shown when the Program key is pressed) appears.

The Application selecting screen (the screen shown when the

Application key is pressed) appears.

The Accessibility Copy screen (the screen shown when the

Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Copy screen) appears.

The Accessibility Send screen (the screen shown when the

Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Send screen) appears.

Each application is activated and the initial screen appears.

Application name

(Maximum 6 applications)

For example, Internet Browser

Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.


2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Default Screen .

3 Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen.

NOTE: The application names appear if the applications are installed and officially licensed on.

4 Press [OK].

Sound

Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details.

Volume

Item

Key Confirmation

Job Finish

Ready

Warning

Value

0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum) to

5 (Maximum)

Off, On

Off, On

Off, On

Off, On

Description

Set the buzzer volume level.

Emit a sound when the control panel and touch panel keys are pressed.

Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Emit a sound when errors occur.

8

8-3


Use the procedure below to set the sound options.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Sound and then [Next] of Buzzer.

3 Press [Change] of Volume, Key Confirmation, Job Finish, Ready, or Warning.

4 Select the buzzer volume level, or other sound options.

Original/Paper Settings

Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.

Custom Original Size Setup

Set up frequently-used custom original sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select original size. The dimensions available are as follows.

The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.

Input units

Inch models

Metric models

Dimensions

X: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Up to four custom original sizes can be added. Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Original Size .

3 Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4 , on which you wish to register the size.

4 Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X(horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.

5 Press [OK].

6 Move to the copy, send, or document box screen and press the Reset key.

Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print

Set up a maximum of four frequently-used custom paper sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray.

The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.

Input units

Inch models

Metric models

Dimensions

H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)

V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

8-4


Up to four custom paper sizes can be added.

Select media type for each paper size.

Media type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8

NOTE:

Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7 for Custom 1-8 for media type.

Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Paper Size .

3 Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4 , on which you want to register the size.

4 Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.

5 Press [Media Type] to select the type of paper and press [OK] if necessary.

6 Press [OK].

7 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.

Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes

Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1, 2 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 3 and 4).



Paper

Size

Auto

Standard

Sizes 1

Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.

Available options are as follows:

Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II

Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio

*

**

Standard

Sizes 2

Media Type

Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.

Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B5, B5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio

II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

Plain (105 g/m

2

or less), Rough*, Vellum (64 g/m

2

or less), Recycled,

Preprint**, Bond*, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,

Thick (106 g/m

2

and more)*, High Quality, Custom 1-8*

To change to a media type other than Plain

, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7

. When the paper weight settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.

• Rough: Heavy 3

• Bond: Heavy 3

• Thick: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy

• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy3 or Extra Heavy


Special Paper Action on page 8-10

.

8

8-5


Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings , [Next] of Cassette Setting , [Next] of Cassette

1 to Cassette 4 , on which you want to register the size, and then [Change] of Paper Size .

3 To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.

To select paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] for Paper Size.


5 Press [Change] of Media Type to select media type and press [OK].

Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray

Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use.



*

**

Paper

Size

Auto

Standard

Sizes 1

Standard

Sizes 2

Others

Size

Entry

Media Type

Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.

Available options are as follows:

Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II,

Executive

Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio

Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.

Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II,

Executive, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

Select special standard sizes or custom sizes*.

ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope

#6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope

C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2

Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.

Inch models:

H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)

V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models:

V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Plain (105 g/m 2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m 2 or less), Labels,

Recycled, Preprint**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,

Envelope, Thick (106 g/m 2 and more), Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8**

Refer to

Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-4 for selecting Custom 1- 4 for

Custom Paper Size.

Refer to

Paper Weight on page 8-7 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from Media Type.


Special Paper Action on page 8-10 .

NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain , refer to

Paper Weight on page 8-7

8-6


Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings , [Next] of MP Tray Setting and then [Change] of Paper Size .

3 To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.

To select paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] for Paper Size.

If you select [Size Entry], press [+], [–] to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.

Press [# Keys] to enter the paper size using the numeric keys.


5 Press [Change] of Media Type to select the media type and press [OK].

Paper Weight

Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows.

Paper types and weights

Y : Available N : Not available

Paper Weight

Weight (g/m

2

),

Media type

Plain

Transparency

Rough

Vellum

Labels

Recycled

Preprinted

Bond

Cardstock

Color

Prepunched

Letterhead

Light

64 g/m

2 or less

Y

N

Y

Y (default)

Y **

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1

60 g/m

2 to

75 g/m

2

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

**

76 g/m

2 to

90 g/m

2

Y (default)

N

Y

Y

Y **

Y (default)

Y (default)

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

(default)

(default)

(default)

91 g/m

2 to

105 g/m

2

Y*

N

Y (default)

Y

Y **

Y

Y

Y (default)

N

Y

Y

Y

106 g/m

2 to

128 g/m

2

N

Y **

Y **

N

Y**

(default)

N

N

Y

Y **

N

N

N

Heavy 2

129g/m to g/m

2

Y **

Y

N

Y

N

N

Y

(default)

N

N

N

N

Y **

**

**

2

Heavy 3

164g/m

2 and more

Extra

Heavy

Transparencies

N

Y

Y

N

Y **

N

N

Y

Y

N

N

N

**

**

**

**

Y **

N

(default)

N

N

N

Y **

N

N

Y **

N

N

N

8

8-7


Paper Weight Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3

Thick

Envelope

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y **

Y (default)

Y **

(default)

Y

Y

**

**

Coated Y ** Y ** Y ** Y **

(defaut)

Y ** Y ** Y **

High Quality

Custom 1-8

*

**

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

(default)

(default)

Y

Y

N

Y

N

Y

N

Y **

When Normal 3 is selected with the machine that installs the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher, the maximum sheets for stapling becomes 40 sheets for A4 or less sized paper.

The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes.

Extra

Heavy

Y

Y

**

**

Y **

N

Y **

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.


Duplex Prohibit

Permit

Name

Duplex printing allowed.

Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 15 characters. Selecting media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.

Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Media Type Setting .

3 Press [Next] for the media type whose weight you want to change.

4 Press [Change] of Paper Weight .

5 Select the weight and press [OK].

6 Press [Close].

The previous screen reappears.

7 To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 (-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Duplex . Select [Prohibit] or [Permit] and press [OK].

The previous screen reappears.

8 Press [Close].

9 To change the name for Custom 1(-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Name . Enter the name and press [OK].

NOTE:

Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.

8-8


Default Paper Source

Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-4 and Multi Purpose Tray.

NOTE: [Cassette 3] is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3,000 sheet paper feeder is installed, and [Cassette 4] is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Default Paper Source .

3 Select a paper cassette for the default setting.

4 Press [OK].

5 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.

Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only)

Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.

The table below lists the special or non-standard original sizes.

Item

A6/Hagaki

Folio

11x15"

Description

As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic detection.

Select Folio for automatic detection.

Select the 11×15" size for automatic detection.

Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Original Auto Detect .

3 Select [A6] or [Hagaki] of A6/Hagaki .

Select [Off] to disable automatic detection or [On] to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15" respectively.

4 Press [OK].

Media for Auto Selection (Color/B&W)

Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection . If Plain is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.

NOTE: Default media types can be set for both Color and Black and White.

8

8-9


Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Media for Auto (Color) or Media for Auto (B & W).

3 Select [All Media Types] or any media type for paper selection.

4 Press [OK].

Paper Source for Cover Paper

Select paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1-4 or Multi Purpose Tray. Cover is used for Booklet (see

page 4-18

) and Cover (see page 4-21 ) modes.

NOTE: [Cassette 3] is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3,000 sheet paper feeder is installed, and [Cassette 4] is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings , [ ] and then [Change] of Paper Source for

Cover .

3 Select the paper source to load cover paper.

4 Press [OK].

Special Paper Action

When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select

[Speed Priority].

The table below lists the available settings and their details.

Item

Adjust Print Direction

Speed Priority

Description

Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little slower. Select this item to print on Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.

Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation.

Select this item when paper orientation is not important.

8-10

If you select [Adjust Print Direction], load paper according to the steps below.

Example: copying on Letterhead


Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray

Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray

NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is supposed to be done, upward.

Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.


2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings , [ ] and then [Change] of Special Paper

Action .

3 Select [Adjust Print Direction] or [Speed Priority].

4 Press [OK].

Switching Unit of Measurement

Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Use the procedure below to change the input units.


2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Measurement .

3 Select [mm] for metric or [inch] for inch.

4 Press [OK].

8

8-11


Error Handling

Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for the errors are as follows.

Duplexing Error

Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type.

Item

1-sided

Display Error

Printed in 1-sided

Description

Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

Finishing Error

Select alternative actions when finishing (stapling or offsetting) is not available for the selected paper size or media type.

Processing Description

Ignore

Display Error

The setting is ignored and the job is printed.


No Staple Error

Select what to do when staples run out during printing.

Item

Ignore

Display Error

Description

Printing continues without stapling.


NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optionaldocument finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is installed.

Stapling Limit Error

Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing.

Item

Ignore

Display Error

Description

Printing continues without stapling.

Error message to cancel printing is displayed

NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optionaldocument finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is installed.

8-12


Punch Waste Full Error

Select what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.

Item

Ignore

Display Error

Description

Printing continues without punching.


NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are installed.

Paper Mismatch Error

Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi-purpose tray.

Processing Description

Ignore

Display Error

The setting is ignored and the job is printed.


Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.


2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Error Handling .

3 Press [Change] at the error you wish to change the handling.

4 Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press [OK].

5 The previous screen appears. To set the handling for a different error, repeat steps 3 and 4.

8

8-13


Paper Output

Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Custom Box, computers, and FAX RX data. The options are as follows.

Output Tray Descriptions

Top Tray

Tray A, Tray B*, Tray C*

Finisher Tray*

Job Separator

Delivery on Top Tray of the machine.

Delivery to trays A to C in the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher.

Delivery on Tray set to the optional document finisher.

Delivery on the optional job separator.

*

Tray 1 to 7* Delivery to trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray).

Select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face Down] (print surface down) for paper orientation at output.

NOTE: The optional job separator, document finisher, or 3,000 sheet document finisher are required.

FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed.

Use the procedure below to select the output tray.


2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Paper Output .

3 Press [Change] of Copy/Custom Box , Printer , or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2 .

NOTE: FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed. If you have 2 optional fax kits installed, Fax

Port 2 appears. You can specify the output tray for the second kit (Dual FAX).

4 Select Output Tray.

For [Finisher Tray], [Tray B], [Tray C] or [Tray 1] to [Tray 7], select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face

Down] (print surface down) as the paper orientation at output.

5 Press [OK].

6 When selecting [Face Up] (print surface up) as the paper orientation at output, press [Page Order with Face

Up] and then select the order of the output pages from [Ascending] or [Descending].

NOTE: Selecting [Descending] accelerates the starting time of copying.

7 When changing the output tray of Copy/Custom Box , move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.

8-14


Orientation Confirmation

Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when using the following functions. (For more information, refer to

page 4-9 for Original Orientation.

)

• Duplex

• Margin/Centering originals

• Border erase

• Combine mode

• Memo mode

• Page numbering

• Booklets

• Staple/Punch (optional feature)

Orientation Confirmation Setting

Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting.


2 Press [Common Settings] and [Change] of Orientation Confirmation .

3 Select the default for [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

Settings for Color Toner Empty Action

Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out.

Use the procedure below to specify the action performed when there is no color toner.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and then [Change] of Color Toner Empty Action .

3 Select [Stop Printing] or [Print in Black & White].

4 Press [OK].

8

IMPORTANT: You cannot change the setting to black and white printing by selecting [Print in Black & White] once the color toner runs out. If you want to use [Print in Black & White], specify the action before the color toner runs out. Once the color toner runs out, the machine continues printing in black and white up to 500 pages in

A4/Letter size.

Function Defaults

Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed.

Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.

IMPORTANT: When you have changed the defaults, to enable the change immediately, move to the copy, send, or document box screen and press the Reset key.

8-15



Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below.

Item

Top Edge Top

Top Edge Left

Description

Select the original's top edge at the top.

Select the original's top edge at the left.

Refer to page 4-9

for Original Orientation.

Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Orientation .

3 Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] for the default.

4 Press [OK].

Continuous Scan

Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below.

Off

On


Continuous scan not performed

Continuous scan performed

Refer to page 4-9

for Original Orientation.

Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Continuous Scan .

3 Select [Off] or [On] for the default.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.

4 Press [OK].

8-16


Original Image

Set the default original document type. The available default settings are shown below.


Text+Photo

Photo

Printed Photo

Text

Text and photos together.


For photos printed in magazines, etc.

Only text, no photos.

Map for OCR

For maps, etc.

Image quality suitable for OCR software.*

Printed Document

*

For documents printed from this machine.

This function is only available for black and white mode.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Image .

3 Select the default original image.

4 Press [OK].

Scan Resolution

Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi,

200x400dpi Super Fine, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal.

Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Scan Resolution .

3 Select the default resolution.

4 Press [OK].

Color Selection (Copy)

Select the default copying color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below.

Color mode

Auto Color

Full Color

Black & White

Description

Automatically recognize whether documents are color or black and white.

Scan document in full color.

Scan document in black and white.

8

8-17


Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of mode Color

Selection(Copy) .

3 Select the default color setting.

4 Press [OK].

Color Selection (Send/Store)

Select the default color mode for scanning documents. The available default settings are shown below.

Color mode Description

Auto Color (Color/Gray) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.

Auto Color (Color/B & W) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and White.

Full Color

Grayscale

Black & White

Scan document in full color.

Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish.

Scan document in black and white. File size is smaller than Full

Color or Grayscale.

Use the procedure below to select the default color mode.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Color Select.(Send/Store) .

3 Select the default color mode.

4 Press [OK].

File Format

Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below.

Item

PDF

TIFF

JPEG

XPS

High Comp. PDF

Description

Send files in PDF format.

Send files in TIFF format.

Send files in JPEG format.

Send files in XPS format.

Send files in High Comp. PDF format (refer to

page 5-14

).

NOTE:

Refer to page 5-12 for file formats.

8-18


Use the procedure below to select the default file format.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Format .

3 Select the default file format.

4 Press [OK].

File Separation

Select the default file separation setting. The available default settings are shown below.


Off

Each Page

No file separation performed (all the pages are compiled in one file).

Each scanned page is created into a separate file.

NOTE:

Refer to page 5-13 for file separation.

Use the procedure below to select the default file separation.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Separation .

3 Select the default for [Off] or [Each Page].

Press [OK].

Density

Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below.


Manual (Normal 0)

Auto

Set to (Normal 0) in the Manual density.

Set to Auto density.

8

NOTE: You cannot specify the density if you have selected [Full Color], [Auto Color (Color/Gray)], or

[Grayscale] in Color Select.(Send/Store) .

Use the procedure below to select the default density.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults , [ ] and then [Change] of Density .

3 Select the default density.

4 Press [OK].

8-19


Zoom

Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available default settings are shown below.

100%

Auto


Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).

Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size/ sending size.

Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults , [ ] and then [Change] of Zoom .

3 Select the default zoom setting.

4 Press [OK].

File Name Entry

Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.

NOTE:

Refer to page 4-41 and

page 5-25

for name entry.

Use the procedure below to set the default file name.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults , [ ] and then [Change] of File Name Entry .

3 Press [File Name] to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters.

NOTE:


4 Press [OK].

5 Press [Date and Time] to add the date/time to the job, or press [Job No.] to add the job number to the job.

The added information will be displayed in Additional Info .

6 Press [OK].

E-mail Subject/Body

Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals by E-mail.

NOTE:

Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-25

.

Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.

8-20



2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults , [ ], and then [Change] of E-mail Subject/Body .

3 Press [Subject] to enter an E-mail subject not more than 60 characters.

NOTE:


4 Press [OK].

5 Press [Body] to enter an E-mail Body not more than 500 characters.

6 Press [OK].

7 Check that the entries are correct and press [OK].

Border Erase Default

Set the default width to be erased as a border. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.

Inch

Metric

Input units Range

0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)

0 mm to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)

8

NOTE:


page 5-23 for Border Erase

.

Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults , [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase Default .

3 Press [+] or [–] for the Border and Gutter width to erase.

You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.

4 Press [OK].


Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. The table below shows the available settings.

Item

Same as Front Page

Do Not Erase

Description

Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page

No Border Erase performed on the back page

NOTE:


page 5-23

for Border Erase.

Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back of the page.

8-21



2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults , [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase to Back

Page .

3 Press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].

4 Press [OK].

Margin Default

Set the default margin. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.

Inch

Metric

Input units Range

-0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

-18 mm to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Use the procedure below to set the default margin width.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults , [ ] and then [Change] of Margin Default .

3 Use the [+] or [-] to enter the margin widths for Left/Right and Top/Bottom .

You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.

4 Press [OK].

Auto Image Rotation

Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting. The table below shows the available settings.

Off

On


No Auto Image Rotation performed.

Auto Image Rotation performed.

NOTE:

Refer to page 4-37

for Auto Image Rotation .

Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults , [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Image Rotation .


4 Press [OK].

8-22


EcoPrint

Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings.


Off

On

No EcoPrint performed.

EcoPrint performed.

NOTE:

Refer to page 4-12 for EcoPrint.

Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults , [ ] twice, and then [Change] of EcoPrint .


4 Press [OK].

PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image

Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG file quality. Five options are available from 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5

High Quality (Low Comp.).

NOTE: Higher quality will make the stored files larger.

Refer to page 5-12 for file formats.

Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults . Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of PDF/

TIFF/JPEG Image .

3 Select the default image quality from [1] (Low Quality) to [5] (High Quality).

4 Press [OK].

8

8-23


High Comp. PDF Image

Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.


Item

Compression Ratio Priority

Standard

Quality Priority

Description

Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size.

Standard quality

Image quality is given priority with larger file size.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for highly compressed PDF files.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults . Press [ ] twice and [Change] of High

Comp. PDF Image .

3 Select the default for [Compression Ratio Priority], [Standard], or [Quality Priority].

4 Press [OK].

Color TIFF Compression Settings

Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine. Use the procedure below to set the default Color TIFF Compression setting.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults . Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of Color

TIFF Compression .

3 Select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].

4 Press [OK].

Repeat Copying

Select the Repeat Copy default. The options are as follows. The table below shows the available settings.

Off

On


No Repeat Copy is performed.

Repeat Copy is performed.

NOTE: This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or the Repeat Copy job is set to 0 .

Refer to page 4-42 for Repeat Copy.

Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting.

8-24



2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults . Press [ ] twice and [Change] of Repeat

Copy .


4 Press [OK].

Collate/Offset

Set the defaults for Collate/Offset. The table below shows the available settings.

Collate

Offset

Item

Off

On

Off

Each Set

(Each Page)

Description

Collate not performed.

Collate performed.

Offset not performed.

Offset performed. (If [Off] is selected of Collate, it is performed [Each Page].)

NOTE:

Refer to page 3-14

for Collate/Offset.

Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults . Press [ ] twice and [Change] of Collate/Offset .

3 Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively.

4 Press [OK].

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file. The table below shows the available settings.

Item

Fit to Paper Size

Image Resolution

Fit to Print Resolution

Description

Fit the image size to the selected paper size.

Print at resolution of the actual image.

Fit the image size to the print resolution.

Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print settings.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults . Press [ ] twice and [Change] of JPEG/TIFF

Print .

3 Select the default for [Fit to Paper Size], [Image Resolution], or [Fit to Print Resolution].

4 Press [OK].

8

8-25


XPS Fit to Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.

Use the procedure below to set the default XPS Fit to Page settings.


2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults . Press [ ] twice and [Change] of XPS Fit to

Page .


4 Press [OK].

8-26


Copy Settings

The following settings are available for copying functions.

• Paper Selection …8-27

• Auto Paper Selection …8-27

• Auto % Priority …8-28

• Reserve Next Priority …8-28

• Preset Limit …8-29

• Quick Setup Registration …8-29


Paper Selection

Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings.

Auto

Item

Default Paper Source

Description

Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals.

Select paper source set by Default Paper Source (refer to page 8-9

).

Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.


2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Paper Selection .

3 Press [Auto] or [Default Paper Source].

4 Press [OK].

5 Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.

Auto Paper Selection

If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table below shows the available settings.


Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.

Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom.

8

8-27


Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.


2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto Paper Selection .

3 Press [Most Suitable Size] or [Same as Original Size].

4 Press [OK].


Auto % Priority

When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/ zoom) is performed. The table below shows the available settings.

Off

On


No zoom performed (copied in original size).

Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.

Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.


2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto % Priority .


4 Press [OK].


Reserve Next Priority

Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and for canceling jobs.

Use the procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority setting.


2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Reserve Next Priority .


4 Press [OK].

8-28


Preset Limit

Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies.

Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.


2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Preset Limit .

3 Press [+] or [–] or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies.

4 Press [OK].

Quick Setup Registration

Select the copying functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary. Six items from the following options are available.

Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch, Density, Duplex, Combine, Collate/Offset, Original Image,

Original Size, Original Orientation, Color Selection, Continuous Scan

NOTE:

Refer to Quick Setup Screen on page 3-43 for the Quick Setup steps.

Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.


2 Press [Copy] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration .

3 Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.

4 Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the

Quick Setup.

5 Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

8

8-29


Sending Settings

The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options.


• Destination Check before Send …8-30

• Color Type …8-31

• Entry Check for New Destination …8-31

• Setting the Default Send Screen …8-32



Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original, Sending Size, Original Orientation, File Format, Density,

Original Image, Scan Resolution, FAX TX Resolution, Color Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan



2 Press [Send] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration .


4 Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the

Quick Setup.


Destination Check before Send

When performing sending jobs, display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key.


Off

On


Do not display the confirmation screen of destinations.

Display the confirmation screen of destinations.

NOTE:

Refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3-29 for the Quick Setup steps.

This setting is available with 55/50 ppm model.

8-30


Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send.


2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Dest. Check before Send .

3 Select [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

Color Type

Set the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.

RGB sRGB


Send color documents in RGB.

Allows you to match the color space for machines that support sRGB.

Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.

Use the procedure below to set the color type.


2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Color Type .

3 Select [RGB] or [sRGB].

4 Press [OK].

Entry Check for New Destination

When adding new destination, display the entry check screen to check the entered destination. The table below shows the available settings.

Off

On


Do not display the entry check screen.

Display the entry check screen.

8

NOTE: This setting is available with 55/50 ppm model.

Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send.


2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Entry Check for New Dest .

3 Select [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

8-31


Setting the Default Send Screen

Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key.


Item

Destination

Detail

Displays the destination screen when the Send key is pressed

(screen for sending).

Displays the address book when the Send key is pressed Address Book

Use the procedure below to set the default send screen.


2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Default Screen .

3 Press [Destination] or [Address Book].

4 Press [OK].

8-32


Document Box Settings

The following settings are available for Document Box.

• Registering / Editing Box …8-33

• Default Setting …8-33

• Job Box …8-33


Registering / Editing Box

Creates a new box, edits a box, or checks details of a box in the custom box, or deletes a box from the custom

box. For details, refer to Using a Custom Box on page 6-2

.

Default Setting

Sets the time at which documents in the custom box are automatically deleted.

For details, refer to

Setting the document deletion time on page 6-3 .

Job Box

The following three operations can be done. For details, refer to each page shown below.

•

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box ( page 6-13 )

•

Repeat Copy Box ( page 6-15

)

•

Deleting a Form Stored ( page 6-18

)


Select the Storing in Box, Sending from Box, Printing from Box functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

The options are as follows.

Store File Quick Setup

Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original, Resolution, Zoom,

Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image, Continuous Scan

Print Quick Setup

Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch, Duplex, Combine, Delete after Printed

Send Quick Setup

Sending Size, FAX TX Resolution, File Format, Delete after Transmitted

8

8-33




2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration .

3 Press [Next] of Store File , Print , or Send .


5 Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the Quick Setup.


8-34


Printer Settings

Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

• Emulation …8-35

• Color Setting …8-36

• EcoPrint …8-36

• Override A4/Letter …8-37

• Duplex …8-37

• Copies …8-37

• Orientation …8-38

• Form Feed Timeout …8-38

• LF Action …8-39

• CR Action …8-39

• Paper Feed Mode …8-40


8

Emulation

Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.

Selection of emulation

The printer can emulate PCL 6, KPDL and KPDL(Auto).

Use the procedure below to select the emulation.

1 Press the System Menu Key.

2 Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation .

3 Select the desired emulation.

NOTE: If you selected [KPDL(Auto)], set Alternative Emulation

, too. (Refer to page 8-35 )

When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], set KPDL Error Report

, too. (Refer to page 8-36 )

4 Press [OK].

Setting of Alternative Emulation

When you have selected [KPDL(Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to print. The alternative emulation you can set is [PCL6].

Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation.


8-35


2 Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL(Auto)] > [Alt Emulation].

3 Select the desired alternative emulation and then press [OK].

4 Press [OK].

Setting of KPDL error report

When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the error report is output. The default setting is Off (not output).

Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting.


2 Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)] > [KPDL Error Report].

3 Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].

4 Press [OK].

Color Setting

You can choose whether status reports are printed in color or black and white.

Use the procedure below to select the color setting.


2 Press [Printer] and then [Change] of Color Setting .

3 Select [Color] or [Black & White].

4 Press [OK].

EcoPrint

EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a problem.

Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.


2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of EcoPrint .

3 Press [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

8-36


Override A4/Letter

Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table below shows the available settings.

On

Off


A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size is in the paper source.

A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.

Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting.


2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Override A4/Letter .


4 Press [OK].

Duplex

Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings.

Item

1-sided

2-sided Bind

ShortEdge

Description

No duplex mode

Shorter edge bound

Finish

8

2-sided Bind

LongEdge

Longer edge bound

Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.


2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Duplex .

3 Press [1-sided], [2-sided Bind LongEdge], or [2-sided Bind ShortEdge].

4 Press [OK].

Copies

Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.

8-37



2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Copies .

3 Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies.

4 Press [OK].

Orientation

Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape .

Portrait Landscape

Printer Printer

Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.


2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Orientation .

3 Press [Portrait] or [Landscape].

4 Press [OK].

Form Feed Timeout

Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.

Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.


2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of Form Feed Timeout .

3 Press [+] or [–] to set the Form Feed Timeout.

You can set the timeout delay in seconds.

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.

4 Press [OK].

8-38


LF Action

Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). The table below shows the available settings.

Item

LF Only

LF and CR

Ignore LF

Description

Only line feed performed.

Line feed and character return performed.

No line feed performed.

Use the procedure below to specify an LF action.


2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of LF Action .

3 Press [LF Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF].

4 Press [OK].

CR Action

Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The table below shows the available settings.

Item

CR Only

LF and CR

Ignore CR

Description

Only character return performed.

Character return and line feed performed.

No character return performed.

Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.


2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of CR Action .

3 Press [CR Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR].

4 Press [OK].

8

8-39


Paper Feed Mode

While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified. The table below shows the available settings.

Auto

Fixed


Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.

Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.

Use the procedure below to select the paper feed mode.


2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of Paper Feed Mode .

3 Press [Auto] or [Fixed].

4 Press [OK].

8-40


Printing Reports/Sending Notice

Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured.

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges.

Printing Reports

Printable reports are as follows.

Status Page

Check the information including current settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.

Status Page

xxxxxxxxxx

Firmware Version

8

Font List

Check the font samples installed in the machine.

8-41


Network Status Page

Check the information including network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

Network Status Page

xxxxxxxxxx


Service Status Page

More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.

Use the procedure below to print a report.


2 Press [Report] and [Next] of Print Report .

3 Press [Print] for the report you want to print. Printing starts.

A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

Send Result Report

Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the available settings.

Off

On


Error Only

No result report printed.

Result report automatically printed.

Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.

Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error. If two or more destinations are registered, the reports are printed only for the destinations with the errors. Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.


2 Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting , [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of E-mail/

Folder .

3 Press [Off], [On], or [Error Only].

4 Press [OK].

8-42


Report for Job Canceled before Sending

Print a send result report when the job is canceled before being sent.


2 Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting , [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of

Canceled before Sending .

3 Press [Off], [On].

4 Press [OK].

8

8-43


Adjustment/Maintenance

Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

• Copy Density Adjustment …8-44

• Send/Box Density Adjust …8-45

• Drum Refresh …8-45

• Correcting Fine Black Lines …8-46

• System Initialization …8-46

• Display Brightness …8-46

• Silent Mode …8-47

• Auto Color Correction...8-47

• Color Registration...8-47

• Color Calibration Cycle...8-50

• Gray Adjustment...8-51

• Color Calibration...8-52

• Developer Refresh...8-53

• Laser Scanner Cleaning...8-53

• MP Tray Cleaning...8-53

• First Print Position...8-54


Copy Density Adjustment

Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes.

Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Copy Density Adjustment .

3 Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual .

4 Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.

5 Press [OK].

8-44


Send/Box Density Adjust

Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes.

Use the procedure below to adjust the density.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Send/Box Density Adjust.

.

3 Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual .

4 Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.

5 Press [OK].

Drum Refresh

Refresh the drum when image blur or white spots appear on images in copies.

NOTE: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.

To use [Drum Refresh], load Ledger or A3 size paper into the Multi Purpose tray.

Use the procedure below to refresh the drum.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance].

3 Press [Next] of Drum Refresh .

4 Press [Execute] to perform Drum Refresh.

5 After Drum Refresh is completed, press [OK] to return to the Adjustment/Maintenance screen.

8

8-45


Correcting Fine Black Lines

Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the optional document processor used.

Paper feed direction



Off

On(Low)

On(High)

No correction performed.

Correction performed. The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using Off.

Correction performed. Select this item if black streak remains after using On

(Low). The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On (Low).

NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is recommended to keep the default ([Off]).

Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Correcting Black Line .

3 Press [Off], [On(Low)] or [On(High)].

4 Press [OK].

System Initialization

Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode.

Refer to System Initialization on page 8-72

about the initialization procedures.

Display Brightness

Set the brightness of the touch panel.

Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.


8-46


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Display Brightness .

3 Press [1] - [4] (Darker- Lighter) to adjust brightness.

4 Press [OK].

Silent Mode

Make the machine run more quietly. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

Use the procedure below to set Silent mode.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Silent Mode .


4 Press [OK].

Auto Color Correction

This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white.

Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Color Correction .

3 Press one of keys [1] to [5] (Color - B & W) to set the detection level.

4 Press [OK].

Color Registration

When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift.

Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected through normal registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the detailed settings.

NOTE: To perform color registration, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.

8

IMPORTANT: Before performing color registration, be sure to perform color calibration (see

page 8-52 ). If color

drift remains, perform color registration.By performing color registration without performing color calibration, the color drift will be resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.

Normal Registration

Follow the steps below to correct normal color drift.

8-47

Chart Example



2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Color Registration .

3 Press [Print] of Chart . A chart is printed.

On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and

Y (yellow), 3 chart types are printed on one sheet:

H-F (left), V (right), H-R (horizontal).

4 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely overlap each other. If this is the 0 position, registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.

5 Press [Next] of Registration .

6 Press [Change] for the chart to be corrected.

7 Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart and press [OK].

Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press [-].

By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the reverse direction, press [+].

8-48


You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.

8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration values for each chart.

9 Press [Execute] after all values have been entered.

Color registration begins.

10 Press [OK] after color registration is complete.

Detailed Settings

Follow the steps below to perform more detailed correction.

1

Refer to Steps 1-2 of Normal Registration

to display the Color Registration screen.

2 Press [Detail].

3 Press [Print] of Chart (Details) . A chart is printed.

On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and

Y (yellow), charts for H-1 to 7 and V-3 are printed.

Chart Example

8

8-49


4 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position, registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.

From charts V-1 to V-5 , read only the values from

V-3 (center).

5 Press [Next] of Registration (Details) .

6 Press [Change] for the chart to be corrected.

7 Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart and press [OK].

Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, press [-].

By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the reverse direction, press [+].

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.

8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration values for each chart.

9 Press [Execute] after all values have been entered.

Color registration begins.

10 Press [OK] after color registration is complete.

Color Calibration Cycle

After Auto Clear has been activated, or during printing or while processing Color Registration, Performing Color

Calibration... Remaining: 50 seconds may be displayed. While this message is displayed, the machine makes adjustments to maintain image quality. Wait until the message disappears.

Set the color calibration cycle here. The setting items are as follows.

Auto

Short

Standard

Long


Automatically sets the cycle for color calibration.

Sets a short color calibration cycle and increases the number of times performed, with priority to image quality.

Sets a standard color calibration cycle, compromising between image quality and downtime for processing.

Sets a long color calibration cycle and decreases the number of times performed, to ensure minimal downtime.

8-50


Use the procedure below to set the color calibration.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of Color Calibration Cycle .

3 Select [Auto], [Short], [Standard] or [Long].

4 Press [OK].

Gray Adjustment

After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur. Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy

does not match the original. Perform color calibration before using gray adjustment (see page 8-51 ). Use gray

adjustment when the color is not enhanced even after performing color calibration.

Normal and detailed gray adjustment is available. While normal adjustment will almost completely eliminate errors in color tones, you can also use detailed adjustment for stubborn color tone problems or where more precise adjustment is needed.

NOTE: To perform gray adjustment, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.

Normal adjustment

A total of 3 color pattern pages (No. 1 to 3) are is printed during normal adjustment. The printed color patterns are read sequentially during the adjustment.

Use the procedure below for normal adjustment.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Gray Adjustment .

3 Press [Execute]. A color pattern is printed.

Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the color pattern.

4 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the three black boxes aligned to the top.

5 Press [Execute]. The color pattern is read and adjustment begins.

The second color pattern is output.

6 Check that the number "2" (to "3") is printed at the bottom of the color pattern and repeat steps 4 to 6 twice to read color patterns 2 and 3 in sequence.

7 Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.

8

8-51


Detailed Adjustment

A total of 5 color pattern pages (No. 1 to 5) are printed during detailed adjustment. As with normal adjustment

(page 8-51)

, the printed color patterns are read sequentially during detailed adjustment.

Use the procedure below to carry out detailed adjustment.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Gray Adjustment .

3 Press [Detail].

4 Press [Execute]. A color pattern is printed.

Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the color pattern.

5 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the three black boxes aligned to the top.

6 Press [Execute]. The color pattern is read and adjustment begins.

The second color pattern is printed.

7 Check that the number "2" (to "5") is printed at the bottom of the color pattern and repeat steps 5 to 7 four times to read color patterns 2, 3, 4 and 5 in sequence.

8 Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.

Color Calibration

After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output may shift or color drift may occur. Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate color by adjusting hue and color drift in detail. Use gray adjustment when the color is not enhanced even after performing color calibration (see

page 8-51

). If the hue and color are not enhanced, use color registration (see

page 8-47

).


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Color Calibration .

3 Press [Execute]. Color Calibration begins.

4 Press [OK] after Color Calibration is complete.

8-52


Developer Refresh

When the printing is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner, refresh the developer.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Developer Refresh .

3 Press [Execute]. Developer Refresh begins.

NOTE: Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.

4 Press [OK] after Developer Refresh is complete.

Laser Scanner Cleaning

If white or color streaks appear on images, perform Laser Scanner Cleaning.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Laser Scanner Cleaning .

3 Press [Execute]. Laser Scanner Cleaning begins.

4 Press [OK] after Laser Scanner Cleaning is complete.

MP Tray Cleaning

If dirt appears on images when using the multi purpose tray , perform MP Tray Cleaning .


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of MP Tray Cleaning .

3 Load two sheets of A4 or Letter paper in the multi purpose tray.

4 Press [Execute]. MP Tray Cleaning begins.

Press [OK] after MP Tray Cleaning is complete.

8

8-53


First Print Position

Using this function speeds up either of the first print time of black and white printing or color printing by changing the default start position of the first print. In addition, the machine can automatically detect the appropriate position depending on your usage.

Item

Standard

Black & White Priority

Color Priority

Auto

Description

Default of the first print time.

Speed up the first print time of black and white printing.

Speed up the first print time of color printing.

Automatically detects the appropriate position depending on your usage.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of First Print Position .

3 Select [Standard], [Black & White Priority], [Color Priority] or [Auto].

4 Press [OK].

8-54


Date/Timer

Date/Timer settings include:

• Date/Time …8-55

• Date Format …8-55

• Time Zone …8-56

• Auto Panel Reset …8-56

• Low Power Timer …8-57

• Auto Sleep …8-57

• Error Clear Timer …8-59

• Interrupt Clear Timer …8-59


Date/Time

Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.

CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.

Use the procedure below to set the date and time.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date/Time .

3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the date and time respectively.

4 Press [OK].

NOTE:

If you try to change the date/time when a trial application (page 8-83)

is running, the If you change

Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure?

message is displayed. To change the date/ time, press [Yes].

8

Date Format

Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.

Use the procedure below to select the date format.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date Format .

3 Select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/MM/DD] and press [OK].

8-55


Time Zone

Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT.

Use the procedure below to set the time difference.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Time Zone .

3 Select the location.

NOTE: Press [ ] or [ ] to select the location.

4 Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].

NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear.

Auto Panel Reset

If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.

NOTE:

Refer to page 8-15 for the default settings.

Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF

Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Panel Reset .


4 Press [OK].

8-56


Panel Reset Timer

If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset , set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset . Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset , the time display does not appear.

Use the procedure below to set the reset time.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Panel Reset Timer .

3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on.


4 Press [OK].

Low Power Timer

You can specify the amount of time to wait before Low Power Mode.

Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute increments).

For more information on Low Power Mode, refer to the

Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9 .

Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Low Power Timer].

3 Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Low Power Mode is turned on.

4 Press [OK].

Auto Sleep

If no job runs for a certain period of time, automatically enter Sleep Mode. Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10

for Sleep.

Auto Sleep ON/OFF

Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not.

NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary.

Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Sleep .


4 Press [OK].

8

8-57


Sleep Timer

Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute).

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Sleep, the time display does not appear.

Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Sleep Timer .

3 Press [+] and [–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Auto Sleep is turned on.

4 Press [OK].

Auto Error Clear

If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto

Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses.

The following errors are automatically cleared.

Print overrun

Memory is full

Auto Error Clear ON/OFF

Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not.

Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Error Clear .


4 Press [OK].

8-58


Error Clear Timer

If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear , set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Options are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear , the time display does not appear.

Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ ] and then [Change] of Error Clear Timer .

3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until printing restarts.


4 Press [OK].

Interrupt Clear Timer

Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused. Any period between 5 and 495 seconds (in five-second increments) can be set.

The procedure for setting the interrupt clear timer is explained below.


2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ ] and then [Change] of Interrupt Clear Timer .

3 Press [+] or [-] to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer.

4 Press [OK].

8

8-59


Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)

Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional).

Adding a Destination

Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with administrator privileges.

Adding a contact

A maximum of 2,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional).

Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.


2 Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book , [Add], [Contact] and then [Next].

3 To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.

4 Press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-2500).

To have the number assigned automatically, enter

“

0000

”

.

NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 2,500 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.

If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Register] and the number cannot be registered. If you set

“

0000

”

as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.

5 Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears.

6 Press [Change] of Name .

7 Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears.

NOTE:


8 Press [E-mail] to add an e-mail address, [SMB] to add a folder on the computer, or [FTP] to add an FTP folder.

The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.

8-60


E-mail Address

Press [Change] of E-mail Address , enter the E-mail address and press [OK].The table below explains the items to be entered.

NOTE:


The Folder (FTP) Address

Press [Change] of Host Name , Path , Login User Name and Login Password , enter the information for each item and press [OK].

The table below explains the items to be entered.

Host Name*

Path

Item

Login User Name

Login Password

*

Description

FTP server host name or IP address

Path for the file to be stored (e.g., "\User\ScanData")

If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.

User name FTP server login

Password for FTP server login

Max. No. of

Characters

70

128

64

64

If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" format.

(e.g., FTPhostname:140)



NOTE:


Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.

8

8-61


The Folder (SMB) Address

Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password , enter the information for each item and press [OK].

The table below explains the items to be entered.


Max. No. of

Characters

Host Name*

Path

Login User Name

Host name or IP address of the sending computer 70

Path to the folder used to save files (e.g.,

“

\User\ScanData

”)

128

User name for folder access

For example, abcdnet\james.smith

64

Login Password

*

Password for folder access 64

If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the

“

Host name: port number

”

format.

(e.g., SMBhostname:140)



NOTE:


Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the computer you chose. If the connection fails, check the entries you made.

9 Check if the destination entry is correct and press [Register]. The destination is added to the Address Book.

Adding a Group

Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.

NOTE: Before adding a group in the Address Book, the contacts to be included in the group must be added first. Up to 100 destinations for the e-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, and the total of 10 destinations for the

FTP and SMB can be registered per a group.

Use the procedure below to register a group.


2 Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book , [Add], [Group] and then [Next].

3 To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.

8-62


4 Use [+]/[-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500).

To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".

NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of 2,000 numbers for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.

If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Register] and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address number, the address is registered under the lowest available number.

5 Press [OK]. The Add Group screen reappears.

6 Press [Change] of Name .

7 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters.

NOTE: Refer to the

Character Entry Method on page Appendix-7


8 Press [Member].

9 Press [Add].

10 Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group.

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to


for Address List.

11 Press [OK].

If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 9 to 11.

12 Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press [Register]. Now the group is added to the Address Book.

Editing a Destination

Edit/delete the destinations (Contacts) you added to the Address Book.

Use the procedure below to edit a destination.


2 Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of Address Book .

3 Select a destination or group to edit.


Specifying


for Address List.

4 Press [Detail].

The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.

8

8-63


Editing a Contact

1 Change Address Number , Name and destination type and address. Refer to

Adding a contact on page

8-60

for the details.

2 After you have completed the changes, press [Register].

3 Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination.

Editing a Group

1 Change Address Number and Name . Refer to

Adding a Group on page 8-62 for the details.

2 Press [Member].

3 To delete any destination from the group, select the destination and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion.

4 After you have completed the changes, press [Register].

5 Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group.

Deleting a Contact or Group

Repeat Steps 1 to 3, press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion. Deletion is performed.

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

Add a new destination (contact or group). A maximum of 1000 destinations can be registered.

NOTE:

Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-30 for use of One Touch Key.

Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One Touch key.


2 Press [Edit Destination] and [Register/Edit] of One Touch Key .

3 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.] enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.

Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.

4 Press [Register/Edit]. The address book appears.

5 Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number.

Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.


Specifying


for Address List.

6 Press [OK]. The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.

8-64


Editing One Touch Key

Edit/delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.

Use the procedure below to edit the One Touch key.


2 Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of One Touch Key.

3 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.] enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.


Changing the Registered Information

1 Press [Register/Edit].

2 Select a new destination (Contact or group). Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.



for Address List.

3 Press [OK].

4 Press [Yes] on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key.

Deleting the Registered Information

1 Press [Delete].

2 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.

8

8-65


Sort Settings

Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.


No.

Name

Item Detail

Displays the destination list in order of the registered number.

Displays the destination list in order of the registered name.

Use the procedure below to specify the Sort settings.


2 Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Sort .

3 Select [No.] or [Name].

4 Press [OK].

Narrow Down Settings

This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed when the address book is displayed.


Off

E-mail

Folder

FAX i-FAX

Group

Item Detail

Displays all destination types in the destination list.

Displays only e-mail destinations.

Displays only folder (SMB or FTP) destinations.

Displays only FAX destinations.

Displays only i-FAX destinations.

Displays only groups.

Use the procedure below to specify the Narrow Down settings.


2 Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Narrow Down .

3 Select the type of destination filter.

4 Press [OK].

8-66


Internet Browser Setup

This procedure sets up the Internet browser application. You can specify the following Internet browser settings.

• Internet Browser Setting

• Browser Preferences

• Proxy Settings

Internet Browser Setting

This selects whether or not the Internet browser is used.

Use the procedure below to specify the Internet browser setting.


2 Press [ ] and then [Internet].

NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to

Adding a User on page 11-5

for the default login user name and password.

3 Press [Change] of Internet Browser .


5 Press [OK].

Browser Preferences

This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages are displayed.

NOTE: This is not displayed if you selected Off in

Internet Browser Setting (page 8-67)

.

Use the procedure below to set your Internet browser preferences.






3 Press [Next] of Browser Environment .

4 To set your home page, press [Change] of Home Page , press [URL], enter the URL and then press [OK].

Press [OK] again.

NOTE:


8

8-67


5 To set the text size, press [Change] of Text Size , select [Large], [Medium] or [Small] as the text size and then press [OK].

6 To set the display mode, press [Change] of Display Mode , select [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering] or [Smart-

Fit Rendering] as the display mode and then press [OK].

7 To specify the settings for accepting cookies, press [Change] of Cookie , select [Accept All], [Reject All] or

[Prompt before Accepting] as your cookie acceptance policy and then press [OK].

Proxy Settings

Use the procedure below to specify the proxy settings.






3 Press [Change] of Proxy and then press [On].

 To set a proxy server (HTTP)

1 Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTP) , enter the proxy address and press [OK].

2 Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.

 To set a proxy server (HTTPS)

1 Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTPS) , enter the proxy address and press [OK].

2 Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.

 To set domains for which no proxy is used

1 Press [Keyboard] of Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains , enter the domain name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the

Character Entry Method on page Appendix-7


4 Press [OK].

8-68


Applications

You can install and use applications that will make your day-to-day use of this machine more efficient.

Installing Applications

You can install new applications.

Use the procedure below to install an application.

1 Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB memory slot (A1).

NOTE: If Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.

appears, press [No].


3 Press [ ] and then [Application].




4 Press [Add].

5 Select the application to be installed and press [Install].

You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].

6 When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].

Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the installation may take some time.

Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.

7 To install another application, repeat steps 5 to 6.

8 To remove the USB memory, press [Remove Memory] and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely removed message appears. Then remove the USB memory.

8

8-69


Activating/Deactivating Application

To use an application, set the application to Activate .

Use the procedure below to start using an application.






3 Select the desired application and press [Activate].


NOTE: To exit an application, press [Deactivate].

4 Enter the license key and press [Official].

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to Step 5.

To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.


IMPORTANT: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the application.

Launching Applications

You can launch any application for which Activate is set.

Use the procedure below to launch an application.

1 Press the Application key.

A list of available applications appears on the touch panel.

2 Press the key for the application to be launched.

The application starts up.

3 To exit the application, press [ ✕ ].

4 When the application exit confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].

NOTE: The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.

8-70


Deleting Applications

Use the procedure below to delete an installed application.

IMPORTANT: Always exit the application to be deleted before deleting the application. (Refer to

Activating/

Deactivating Application on page 8-70

.)



NOTE: If login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name

and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-5


3 Select the application to be deleted and press [Delete].


4 When the deletion confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The application is deleted.

8

8-71


System Initialization

Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode.

CAUTION: System initialization will erase Custom Document Boxes, data stored in Document Box, addresses in the Address Book, user property, account information, and settings.

NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the optional Data Security Kit is installed. Refer to the Data Security

Kit (E) Operation Guide on the bundled CD-ROM about the functions added when the Data Security Kit is installed and related procedures.

Using Network Print Monitor allows you to back up addresses in the Address Book.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Execute] of System Initialization .

3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to

Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.


Initialization starts.

IMPORTANT: The Formatting... Do not turn off the main power switch.

message appears during initialization.

Wait until initialization ends.

5 Once the initialization ends, the message Task is completed. Turn the main power switch off and on.

appears. Turn the main power switch off.

Restarting the System

Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

Use the procedure below to restart the system.


2 Press [System] and [Execute] of Restart .

NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to



3 When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The system is restarted.

8-72


Network Setup

The following network settings are available.

• Checking Host Name …8-73

• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-73

• TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-73

• Protocol Detail …8-75

• NetWare Setup …8-76

• AppleTalk Setup …8-76

• WSD Scan Setup …8-76

• WSD Print Setup …8-77

• Secure Protocol …8-77

• IPSec Setting …8-79

• LAN Interface Setup …8-79

Checking Host Name

Check the host name of the machine. Use the procedure below.


2 Press [System], [Next] of Network . Check the host name displayed under Host Name .

TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup

Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.

Refer to TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) on page 2-13

about the procedures.

TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup

Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On , TCP/IP (IPv6):

Off . Use the procedure below.





5 Press [Next] of IPv6 .


7 Press [On]. IP Address (Link Local) appears.

8 Press [OK].




8

8-73


Manual Setting (IPv6)

Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). The manual setting is available when selecting [On] for TCP/IP (IPv6). Use the procedure below.




4 Press [Next] of Manual Setting.

5 Press [IP Address (Manual)] to enter IP address. The format of the IPv6 address is a sequence of numbers

(128 bit in total) separated by colons, e.g. 2001:db8:3c4d:15::1a2c:1a1f.

6 Press [OK].

Press [# Keys] of Prefix Length (0 - 128) to enter the prefix length using the numeric keys.

7 Press [Default Gateway] to enter the default gateway.

8 Check that all the entries are correct and Press [OK].




RA (Stateless) Settings

Select whether or not to use RA (Stateless). The RA (Stateless) settings are available when selecting [On] for

TCP/IP (IPv6) . The default setting is On . Use the procedure below.




4 Press [Change] of RA(Stateless) .

5 Press [On] or [Off] of RA (Stateless) . When selecting [On], IP Address 1 to 5 (Stateless) appears.

6 Press [OK].




DHCP (IPv6) Settings

Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. The DHCP (IPv6) Settings are available when selecting

[On] for TCP/IP (IPv6). The default setting is On . Use the procedure below.




4 Press [Change] of DHCP .

5 Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP . When selecting [On], IP Address (Stateful) appears.

8-74


6 Press [OK].




Protocol Detail

The table below lists the network related function settings. The network related functions are available when

TCP/IP is On.


Default

Setting

NetBEUI

LPD

Selects whether or not to receive documents using

NetBEUI.

Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as the network protocol.

Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP.

On

On

SMTP

(E-mail TX)

POP3

(E-mail RX)

FTP Client

(Transmission)

FTP Server

(Reception)

SMB Client

(Transmission) i-FAX

LDAP

SNMP

SNMPv3

HTTP

HTTPS

Select whether or not to receive

FTP default port 21.

e-mail using POP3.

Select whether or not to send documents using FTP.

When selecting [On], set the FTP Port Number. Use the

Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP.

Select whether or not to send documents using SMB.

When selecting [On], set the SMB default Port Number.

Use the SMB default port 139. For Windows Vista, use 445.

Select whether or not to use i-FAX.

Select whether or not to use LDAP.

Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP.

Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3.

Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP.

Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS.

SSL must be set to [On] in

SSL Setup on page 8-77 .

Off

Off

On

Port:21

On

On

IPP

IPP over SSL

Select whether or not to communicate using IPP. When selecting [On], set the IPP default Port Number. Use the

IPP default port 631.

Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL.

SSL must be set to [On] in

SSL Setup on page 8-77 .

Off

Port:631

Off

Raw Port

*

Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port.

On

Y : The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.

N : The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.

Off

On

On

Port:139

On

Off

On

Restarting the System*

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

8

8-75



The following procedure is an example for specifying the SMTP (E-mail TX) settings.


2 Press [System] and then [Next] of Network to display the network settings screen.

3 Display the item you want to set and press [Change] for that item.

In this example, press [Change] of SMTP (E-mail TX) .


5 Press [OK].




NetWare Setup

Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network from Auto,

Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP. The default settings are " On , Frame Type: Auto ".



2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of NetWare .

3 Press [On].

4 Press the key for the frame type you want to use.

5 Press [OK].




AppleTalk Setup

Select the Apple Talk network connection.

Refer to AppleTalk Setup on page 2-15 about the procedures.

WSD Scan Setup

Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On . Use the procedure below.


2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Scan .


4 Press [OK].




8-76


WSD Print Setup

Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On . Use the procedure below.


2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Print .


4 Press [OK].




Secure Protocol

Encrypt the communication between your PC and the machine using the SSL encryption. After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting

the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-72

.

The following Secure Protocol settings are available.

• SSL Setup …8-77

• IPP Security Setup …8-77

• HTTP Security Setup …8-78

• LDAP Security Setup …8-78

SSL Setup

Select whether or not to use SSL. The default setting is On . Use the procedure below.


2 Press [System], [Next] of Network , [Next] of Secure Protocol , and then [Next] of SSL .


4 Press [OK].




IPP Security Setup

Select the IPP security level. This setup is available when SSL is On . The default setting is IPP over SSL Only .

NOTE: IPP must be set to [On] in

Protocol Detail on page 8-75

.



2 Press [System], [Next] of Network , [Next] of Secure Protocol , and then [Change] of IPP Security .

8

8-77


3 Press [IPP over SSL Only] or [IPP or IPP over SSL].

4 Press [OK].




HTTP Security Setup

Select the HTTP security level. This setup is available when SSL is On . The default setting is HTTPS Only .

NOTE: HTTP must be set to [On] in


.



2 Press [System], [Next] of Network , [Next] of Secure Protocol , and then [Change] of HTTPS Security .

3 Press [HTTP or HTTPS] or [HTTPS Only].

4 Press [OK].




LDAP Security Setup

Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server. This setup is available when SSL is On . The default setting is Off.

NOTE: LDAP must be set to [On] in


.


Item

Off

LDAP over SSL

LDAPv3/TLS

Description

Do not use security employed by the LDAP server.

Use implicit mode for data communication. The server provides services using the LDAP over SSL port (636). Encryption is applied to any data communication using this port.

Use explicit mode for data communication. Select this if the server supports the start TLS command. This uses the same port (389) as LDAP.



2 Press [System], [Next] of Network , [Next] of Secure Protocol , and then [Change] of LDAP Security .

3 Press [Off], [LDAP over SSL] or [LDAPv3/TLS].

8-78


4 Press [OK].




IPSec Setting

Sets up IPSec. The default setting is Off . Use the procedure below.


2 Press [System], [Next] of Network , and then [Change] of IPSec .




3 Press [On].

4 Press [OK].




LAN Interface Setup

Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto . Use the procedure below.


2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of LAN Interface .

3 Select [Auto], [10BASE-T Half], [10BASE-T Full], [100BASE-TX Half] or [100BASE-TX Full] as the LAN interface.

4 Press [OK].




8

8-79


Interface Block Setting

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.

The following interface block settings are available:

• USB Host (USB memory slot setting)

• USB Device (USB interface setting)

• Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)

USB Host (USB memory slot setting)

This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock .

Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.


2 Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Host .




3 Press [Block].

4 Press [OK].

USB Device (USB interface setting)

This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock .

Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting.


2 Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Device .

3 Press [Block].

4 Press [OK].

Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)

This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1 or OPT2). The default setting is Unblock .

Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting.


2 Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of Optional Interface 1 or Optional

Interface 2 .

3 Press [Block].

4 Press [OK].

8-80


Security Level (Security Level setting)

The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use this menu.

Document Guard Setting

When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed, the machine prevents the unauthorized copying and/ or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information.

Use the Security Watermark of Advanced in Printing System Driver to embed the guard pattern in a document.

(Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide for details.)

We suggest you to confirm how the machine performs this function on your environment.

Canceled.

copy

Print the guard pattern using

Printing System

Driver.

Machine Operation after Detecting the Document Guard Pattern send or fax


Common operation

Copy functions

Displays the message that indicates the machine detected the document guard pattern and stops scanning the remaining documents.

Prints the documents in blank from the position that the machine detected the document guard pattern.

Document Box functions Does not store the documents in the hard disk

Send functions Cancels the job.*

FAX functions Does not send the documents.

* Sends the documents that are scanned before the document guard pattern is detected if you have selected File Separation. If not, every documents will not to be sent.

8

8-81


Limitations:

- Scanning speed will be limited to the speed of scanning 600 dpi image. (Printing speed will not be limited.)

- FAX transmission will be limited to the memory transmission.

Note:

- The Printed Document Guard Kit should not fully prevents a leak of information. We do not guarantee any loss incurred while using this feature or when malfunction occurred with this feature.

- The guard pattern printed on the colored paper or paper that is decorated with special design may not be detected.

- We do not guarantee the integrity of the detection. If the malfunction occurs, contact your service representative.

Use the procedure below to specify the Document Guard setting.


2 Press [System] and then [Change] of Document Guard .




3 Press [On].

4 Press [OK].

8-82


Optional Functions

You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.

Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine.

You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis.

• Printed Document Guard Kit

This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank, prohibiting transmission.

NOTE: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the application.

Starting Application Use

Use the procedure below to start using an application.


2 Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function .




3 Select the desired application and press [Activate].


4 In the license key entry screen, press [Official].

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to Step 5.

To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.


IMPORTANT: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the application.

8

8-83


Checking Application Details

Use the procedure below to check the details of an application.


2 Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function .




3 Select the application you want to check the details of and press [Detail].

You can now view detailed information on the selected application.

Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display)

Touch panel characters and key displays can be enlarged. Use the numeric keys to select items and proceed to the next screen.

NOTE: Accessibility can be used only with Copying and Sending registered on the Quick Setup screen.

To set functions other than those displayed in the accessibility screens, you must return to the original display.

Press the Accessibility Display key again.

Press the Accessibility Display key when in the Copy or Send (i.e. the Copy or Send key indicator is On).

Ready to copy.

Auto

Paper

Selection

2-sided

>>2-sided

Duplex

Status

100%

Zoom

2 in 1

Combine

Copies

Quantity

Normal 0

Density

Off

Staple/Punch

10/10/2008 10:10

Enlarged keys or characters appear on the touch panel.

Operation can also be made by pressing any numeric key corresponding to the number displayed. (e.g. Press the 2 key to adjust zoom.)

Follow the instructions on the screen for subsequent operations.

8-84

9 Maintenance

This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement.

•

Cleaning..............................................................................................9-2

•

Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement .........................9-8

9-1

Maintenance

Cleaning

Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.

CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.

Original Cover / Glass Platen

Wipe the backside of the original cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.

IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.

Original Cover

Glass Platen

9-2

Maintenance

Slit Glass/Dual scanning area

Status

Clean the slit glass.

Hold

02/03

1.Open the document processor.

2.Clean the surface of the slit glass located

on the left side with the supplied dry cloth.

3.Close the document processor and press [End].

Note that dirty glass and sheet may cause black streaks to appear in the output.

End

10/10/2008 10:10

If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the optional document processor, clean the slit glass with the supplied cleaning cloth. The message Clean the slit glass.

may be displayed if the slit glass requires cleaning.

When using the document processor to allow dual scanning, clean the dual scanning unit also.

IMPORTANT: Wipe the slit glasses with the dry accessory cloth. Do not use water,soap or solvents for cleaning.

1 Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth compartment.

2 Open the document processor and wipe the slit glass (a).

9 b a

3 Wipe the white guide (b) on the document processor.

4 When using the document processor to allow dual scanning, open the top cover of the document processor.

9-3

5 Wipe the slit glass.

Maintenance

6 Wipe the white roller.

7 Close the document processor top cover and return the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth compartment.

8 Press [End].

9-4

Separator

Clean the separator regularly (at least monthly) to ensure optimum output quality.

1 Open the front cover.

Maintenance

2 Remove cleaning brush (blue colored).

3 Pull up and open left cover 1.

9

4 As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the separator by moving the brush from side to side along the separator.

9-5

Transfer Roller

Maintenance

5 Put away the cleaning brush, press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close.


2 Remove the cleaning brush (blue colored).

3 Pull up and open left cover 1.

9-6

9-7

Maintenance

4 As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the transfer roller by moving the brush from side to side along the roller while rotating the roller by turning the gear at the left end of the roller.

5 Put away the cleaning brush, press the specified position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close.

9

Maintenance

Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement

When the touch panel displays Add toner , replace the toner.

Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may deteriorate output quality.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

Toner Container Replacement


2 Turn the toner container release lever to the vertical position.

9-8

9-9

Maintenance

3 Open the provided plastic disposal bag and place it at the toner container slot.Open the provided plastic disposal bag and place it at the toner container slot.

4 Remove the old toner container by holding the handle and place it in the provided plastic disposal bag.

9

5 Hold the new toner container in both hands and shake it from side to side several times.

Maintenance

6 Hold the new toner container in both hands and gently push it in.

7 Turn the toner container release lever to the horizontal position.

Use the same procedure to replace the other color toner containers.

8 Close the front cover.

NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations

9-10

Waste Toner Box Replacement


Maintenance

2 Press the release button (1) and pull out the waste toner tray (2) .

3 Cap the old waste toner box.

4 Remove the old waste toner box at an angle and place it in the plastic disposal bag provided.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

9-11

9

5 Open the new waste toner box cap.

Maintenance

6 Install a new waste toner box.

7 Press on the left edge of the new waste toner box to lock it.

8 Press the specified position to close the waste toner tray. When the tray reaches the correct position, it locks in place with a clicking sound.

9 Close the front cover.

NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

9-12

10 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine.

•

Solving Malfunctions .........................................................................10-2

•

Responding to Error Messages ........................................................10-6

•

Clearing Paper Jams ......................................................................10-15

10-1

Troubleshooting

Solving Malfunctions

The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.

If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions

Reference

Page

— The operation panel does not respond when the main power switch is turned on.

Pressing the Start key does not produce copies.

Blank sheets are ejected.

Printouts are too light.

Is the machine plugged in?

Is there a message on the touch panel?

Is the machine in Sleep mode?

Are the originals loaded correctly?

Is the machine in Auto

Density mode?

Is the machine in Manual

Density mode?

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.

Determine appropriate response to the message and respond accordingly.

Press the Power key to recover the machine from Sleep mode. The machine will be ready to copy within a minute.

When placing originals on the platen, place them face-down and align them with the original size indicator plates.

When placing originals in the optional document processor, place them face-up.

Set the correct density level for auto density.

Use [Image Quality] to set the correct density level.

When changing the default density level, adjust the density manually and choose the desired level.

Shake the toner container from side to side about several times.

Replace the toner container.

10-6

2-10

2-32

2-34

—

3-9

—

Is the toner distributed evenly within the toner container?

Is there a message indicating the addition of toner?

Is the paper damp?

Is the drum dirty?

Is the scanner dirty?

Is EcoPrint mode enabled?

9-8

9-8

Replace the paper with new paper.

2-20

Carry out Drum Refresh.

8-45

Carry out Developer Refresh.

8-53

Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning.

8-53

Disable EcoPrint mode.

8-36

10-2

Troubleshooting

Symptom

Printouts are too dark.

Checkpoints

Is the machine in Auto

Density mode?

Is the machine in Manual

Density mode?

Corrective Actions

Reference

Page

— Set the correct density level for auto density.

Use [Image Quality] to set the correct density level.

When changing the default density level, adjust the density manually and choose the desired level.

Set the image quality to [Print

Photo].

3-9

—

3-9

Copies have a moire pattern (dots grouped together in patterns and not aligned uniformly).

Printouts are not clear.

Printouts are dirty.

Printouts are fuzzy.

Images are skewed.

Is the original a printed photograph?

Did you choose appropriate image quality for the original?

Is the platen or the document processor dirty?

Is the transfer roller dirty?

Is the drum dirty?

Is the scanner dirty?

Is the Printed Document

Guard Kit enabled?

Is the machine being used in very humid conditions?

Are the originals placed correctly?

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Select appropriate image quality.

9-2

Clean the platen or the document processor.

Brush the transfer roller clean.


9-2

9-6

8-45

Carry out Developer Refresh.

8-53


8-53

Disable the Printed Document

Guard Kit.


Appendix-

6

8-45

When placing originals on the platen, align them with the original size indicator plates.

When placing originals in the optional document processor, align the original width guides securely before placing the originals.

Check the position of the paper width guides.

2-34

2-34

2-35

10

10-3

Troubleshooting


Reference

Page

2-21

Paper often jams.

Is the paper loaded correctly?

Is the paper of the supported type? Is it in good condition?

Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled?

Are there any loose scraps or jammed paper in the machine?

Is the slit glass dirty?

Load the paper correctly.

Remove the paper, turn it over, and reload it.

2-21


2-21

Remove any jammed paper.

10-15

Printouts from the document processor have black lines.

Printouts are wrinkled.

Cannot print.

Documents are printed improperly.

While the operation panel was being used, the keys locked up and do not respond when pressed.

Clean the slit glass.

9-3

Is the paper separator of the paper feed unit dirty?

Is the paper damp?

Clean the paper separator.

9-5

Is the paper set in a proper orientation?

Is the machine plugged in?

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.

Is the machine powered on?

Turn on the main power switch.

Is the printer cable connected?


2-20

Change the orientation in which the paper is positioned.

Connect the correct printer cable securely.

—

—

3-2

2-3

Was the machine powered on before the printer cable was connected?

Is Press Status Key ... displayed at the top of the screen?

Are the application software settings at the PC set properly?

Is the operation panel locked?

Power on the machine after connecting the printer cable.

Press the Status/Job Cancel key,

[Printing Jobs], and then [Resume

All Print Jobs] to restart printing.

Check that the printer driver and application software settings are set properly.

Check the panel lock setting in

Embedded Web Server and change the setting if necessary.

2-3

—

—

Embedded

Web Server

Operation

Guide

10-4

Troubleshooting


Reference

Page

6-20

Cannot print with USB memory.

Was the USB memory formatted with a machine other than this machine?

Is the USB host blocked?

Format the USB memory with this machine.

When displaying an image sent from the machine on the PC, an image size is shrunk vertically or horizontally.

USB memory not recognized.

Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine.

Have you selected

200×100dpi Normal or

200×400dpi Super Fine for the scan resolution?

Check that the USB memory is securely plugged into the machine.

Is the USB host blocked?

Select Unblock in the USB host settings.

—

Select a scan resolution other than

200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi

Super Fine when sending an image.

—

8-80

—

—

—

Perform Gray

Adjustment in the

System Menu.

displayed.

is

Performing Color

Calibration...

appears during continuous copying and copying stops.

White or color streaks appear on prints.

Over long periods of use, the effects of the ambient temperature and humidity can cause color output hues to vary slightly.

The machine is carrying out a calibration process to ensure color stability.

The inside of the machine may be dirty.

Select Unblock in the USB host settings.

Whenever the printed hues differ from the original document or image, carry out Gray Adjustment.

This is not a fault.Resume continuous copying when the calibration process ends.

8-80

8-51

8-50


8-53

10

10-5

Troubleshooting

Responding to Error Messages

If the touch panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.

Alphanumeric

Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions

Reference

Page

Acceptable staple count exceeded.

Add paper in cassette

1.

Add paper in Multi

Purpose tray.

Add staples.

Add toner.

Box is not found.

Box limit exceeded.

Cannot connect to

Authentication

Server.

Is the acceptable staple count exceeded? For details, refer to

Specifications on page

Appendix-24 .

Is the indicated cassette out of paper?

Is the paper of the selected size loaded in the multi purpose tray?

Has any of the document finisher run out of staples?

–

–

–

–

–

Press [Continue] to print without stapling.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.

Load paper.

Load the paper in the multi purpose tray which is of the size and type indicated on the touch panel.

If the staples are depleted, the machine will stop and the location of staple depletion will be indicated on the touch panel.

Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to replace the staple case.

Press [Continue] to print without stapling.


Replace the toner container.

This job is canceled because the specified box cannot be found. Press

[End].

Document box is full, and no further storage is available; Job is canceled.

Press [End].

Repeat Copy box is full, and no further repeat copy is available.

Press [Continue] to print scanned pages.


An error has occurred when connecting to the authentication server. Refer to Responding to

Authentication Server Connection

Error for the error message and corrective actions.

—

2-20

2-24

—

9-8

—

—

—

10-14

10-6

Troubleshooting

Cannot duplex print on this paper.

Cannot execute this job.

Error Message

Cannot offset this paper.

Cannot print the specified number of copies.

Cannot staple at the specified position.

Cannot staple this paper.

Check the cover.

Check the document processor.

Check the finisher.

Clean the slit glass.

Confidential document is detected.

Failed to specify Job

Accounting.

Failed to store job retention data.

–

Checkpoints

Did you select a paper size/ media type that cannot be duplex printed?

–

Did you select a paper size/ media type that cannot be offset?

–

Have you selected a position that cannot be stapled?

Did you select a paper size/ type that cannot be stapled?

Is there any cover which is open?

Is the document processor open?

Is the top cover of the document processor open?

Is the document finisher set correctly?


Reference

Page

Select the available paper type.

Press [Continue] to print without using Duplex.

This job is canceled because it is restricted by Job Accounting. Press

[End].

Select the available paper size/type.

Press [Continue] to print without using Offset.

Only one copy is available due to processing too many jobs in parallel.

Press [Continue] to continue printing.


Select a position that can be stapled.

Press [Continue] to print without using Staple.

Select the available paper size/type.

Press [Continue] to print without using Staple.

Close the cover indicated on the touch panel.

Close the document processor.

3-12

—

3-14

—

—

—

—

—

–

–

–

Close the top cover of the document processor.

Set the document finisher correctly.

For details, refer to the respective

Operation Guides .

Clean the slit glass using the cleaning cloth supplied with the document processor.

The machine detects the documents guard pattern. The scanned document is printed in blank and sending of the document is canceled.

The job is canceled. Press [End].

10-28

—

9-3

8-81

—


—

10

10-7

Troubleshooting

Error Message

FAX box limit exceeded.

Finisher tray is full of paper.

Hard Disk error.

Job is canceled.

Press [End].

Incorrect account ID.

–

Is the acceptable storage capacity exceeded for the document finisher tray?

–

–

Checkpoints Corrective Actions

Reference

Page

FAX box is full, and no further storage is available. The job is canceled.

Press [End]. Try to perform the job again after printing or deleting data from the FAX box.

Remove paper from the document finisher tray.

If printing can be restarted, the touch panel display will prompt you to press

[Continue]. Then press [Continue].

An error has occurred on the hard disk. The possible error codes and their descriptions are as follows.

01: Initialization error. Initialize the hard disk.

04: Insufficient space on the hard disk to complete this operation. Move or delete data stored on the hard disk to increase available space.

The Account ID does not match.

Check the registered Account ID.

Enter the correct password.

—

—

—

—

— Incorrect box password.

Incorrect Login User

Name or Password.

Job Accounting restriction exceeded.

–

Job separator is full of paper.

KPDL error.

Machine failure.

Maximum number of scanned pages.

–

Is the acceptable printing count restricted by Job

Accounting exceeded?

Is the maximum capacity of the job separator exceeded?

–

–

Is the acceptable scanning count exceeded?

Enter correct login user name or password.

The printing count exceeded the acceptable count restricted by Job

Accounting. Cannot print any more.

This job is canceled. Press [End].

Take some paper out of the job separator. Printing then resumes.

PostScript error has occurred.


Internal error has occurred. Make a note of the error code displayed on the touch panel. Turn off the machine, unplug the power cord, and contact your Service Representative.

Only one copy of the scanned pages is available. Press [Continue] to print, send or store the scanned pages.

Press [Cancel] to cancel printing, sending or storing.

—

—

—

—

—

—

10-8

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Memory is full.

Paper jam.

–

–

–

Checkpoints Corrective Actions

Reference

Page

Unable to continue the job as the memory is used up.

Press [Continue] to print the scanned pages. The print job cannot be processed completely.


The process cannot be performed due to insufficient memory. If only

[End] is available, press [End]. The job will be canceled.

If a paper jam occurs, the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel.

Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed paper.


—

—

10-15

— Removable memory error.

Removable memory is full.

Replace all originals and press [Continue].

–

–

Replace the waste toner box.

Remove all originals in the document processor.

Scanner memory is full.

–


—

–

–

Are there any originals left in the document processor?

Remove originals from the document processor, put them back in their original order, and place them again.

Press [Continue] to resume printing.


The waste toner box is full. Replace the waste toner box.

Remove originals from the document processor.

2-34

9-8

—

Send error.

Set the waste toner box.

–

–

Scanning cannot be performed due to insufficient memory of scanner.

Only one copy of the scanned pages is available. Press [Continue] to print, send or store the scanned pages.

Press [Cancel] to cancel the printing job.

An error has occurred during transmission.Refer to

Responding to

Send Error

for the error code and corrective actions.

The waste toner box is not installed correctly. Set it correctly.

—

10-11

9-8

10

10-9

Troubleshooting

Error Message

Staple jam.

System error.

–

–

Checkpoints

The phone receiver is off the hook.

The removable memory is not formatted.

–

Is the removable memory formatted by this machine?

Top tray of the machine is full of paper.

–

Unknown Toner

Installed. PC

Warning low memory.

–

Is the unauthorized product installed?


Reference

Page

If a staple jam occurs, the machine will stop and the location of the jam will be indicated on the touch panel.

Leave the machine on and follow the instruction to remove the jammed staple.

System error has occurred. Confirm that the Attention indicator is lighting, and then turn the main power switch off and on.

Put down the receiver.

—

—

—

Use the removable memory formatted by this machine.

Remove paper from the top tray and press [Continue].

—

—

Install our genuine product that is specified for this machine.

—

Job cannot be started. Try again later. —

10-10

Troubleshooting

Responding to Send Error

When an error occurs during transmission, Send Error appears. Check the error code and error message below, and follow the corresponding corrective actions.

Error

Code

1101

1102

1103

Error Message Corrective Actions

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send i-FAX.

Failed to send via FTP.

Failed to send via SMB.







Check the host name of the SMTP server on the Embedded Web

Server.

Check the host name of FTP.

Check the host name of SMB.

Check the SMB settings.

- Login user name and login password

* If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name.

- Host name

- Path

Check the followings on the

Embedded Web Server.

- SMTP login user name and login password

- POP3 login user name and login password

Check the FTP settings.



- Path

- Folder share permissions of the recipient

Check the SMB settings.



- Path


Check the FTP settings.

- Path


Reference Page

2-18

3-26

3-26

3-26

10

10-11

Troubleshooting

Error

Code

1104

1105

1106

1131

1132

2101

Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page


Check the e-mail address.

* If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot send the e-mail.


Check the i-FAX address.

*If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot send i-FAX.


Select [On] of the SMB settings on the Embedded Web Server.


Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the Embedded Web Server.


Select [On] of the FTP settings on the

Embedded Web Server.


Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on the Embedded Web Server.




3-25

FAX System (S)

Operation Guide

Chapter 8

"Internet Faxing

(i-FAX) (Option)"

2-18

FAX System (S)

Operation Guide

Chapter 8

"Internet Faxing

(i-FAX) (Option)"

2-18

2-18






Check the sender address of SMTP on the Embedded Web Server.

Select [On] of the secure protocol settings on the Embedded Web

Server.

Check the followings of the FTP server.

- Is FTPS available?

- Is the encryption available?

Check the network and SMB settings.

Check the network and FTP settings.

- The network cable is connected.

- The hub is not operating properly.

- The server is not operating properly.

- Host name and IP address

- Port number

Check the network and Embedded

Web Server.



- POP3 server name of the POP3 user

- SMTP server name

2-18

2-18

10-12

Troubleshooting

Error

Code

2102

2103

2201

2202

2203

2231

2204

3101

3201

5101

5102

5103

5104

7102

720f

9181

Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page
















Check the followings of the FTP server.

- Is FTP available?


Check the network.




Check the network.




–

–






–

Check the e-mail size limit of the

SMTP settings on the Embedded

Web Server.

Check the authentication methods of both the sender and the recipient.

Check the network.




Check the SMTP user authentication method of the recipient.

Turn the main power switch off and back on. If this error occurs several times, make a note of the displayed error code and contact your service representative.

2-18

–

–

–

– The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number of pages of 999.

Send the excess pages separately.

–

10

10-13

Troubleshooting

Responding to Authentication Server Connection Error

If an error occurs when connecting to the authentication server, check the error message and follow the corresponding corrective action appears on the operation panel.

Symptom

Cannot connect to authentication server.

Cannot connect to authentication server.


Set machine time to match the server’s time.

Check the domain name.

Check the host name.

Check the connection status with the server.

2-12

Reference Page

11-2

11-2

—

Responding to an Attention Indicator Flashes

If an attention indicator flashes, press [Status/Job Cancel] to check an error message. If the message is not indicated on the touch panel when [Status/Job Cancel] is pressed or the attention indicator flashes for 1.5 seconds, check the following.

Symptom

Cannot send fax.

Checkpoints

Is the modular cord connected correctly?

Is Permitted FAX No. or

Permitted ID No. registered correctly?

Has a communication error occurred?


Connect the modular cord correctly.

Check Permitted FAX

No. and Permitted ID

No..

—

Check error codes in the

TX/RX Result Report and Activity Report. If the error code starts with

"U" or "E", perform the corresponding procedure.

Send again.

—

Reference Page

FAX System (S)

Operation Guide

Chapter 6 "Registering

Permit FAX No." and

"Registering Permit ID

No."

FAX System (S)

Operation Guide

Appendix

"Error Code List"

Is the destination FAX line busy?

Does the destination

FAX machine respond?

Is there an error other than above?

Send again.

Contact your Service

Representative.

—

—

10-14

Troubleshooting

Clearing Paper Jams

Job No.: 000021

Paper jam.

Job Name: doc200810101010

JAM

1.Remove any paper that is inside.

2.Open the fuser cover and remove

the jammed paper.

3.Open cassette 1.

4.Remove the paper.

5.Set the cassette

and close the cover.

If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display Paper

Jam.

and the machine will stop. Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.

03/05

Hold

Status 10/10/2008 10:10

Jam Location Indicators

If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed as the following figure with a letter corresponding to the affected component in the machine. Clearing instructions will also be displayed.

Job Name: doc200810101010 User Name: Mike

Paper jam.

1.Remove the paper.

2.Open the fuser cover and remove

the jammed paper.

3.Close the cover.

H

JAM

Status

Hold

01/03

10/10/2008 10:10

I

I

I

I

K

I

I

I

I

I

I

G

E

E

G

E

E

D

A

F

B

F

C

C

D

D

10

Paper Jam

Location Indicator

G

H

E

F

I

K

C

D

A

B

Paper Jam Location

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Cassette 3 or 4 (Option)

Multi Purpose Tray

Duplex unit

Inside the left cover 1, 3 or 4

Fixing unit

Document processor (Option)

Document finisher (Option)

Job Sparator (Option)

10-15

Reference Page

10-16

10-17

10-18

10-19

10-23

10-22

10-26

10-28

10-29

10-29

Troubleshooting

After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes with the page which jam has occurred.

Precautions with Paper Jams

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

• Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be printed again.

CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting burned.

Cassette 1

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1.

1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

3 Pull out cassette 1.

10-16

Troubleshooting


If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine.

5 Push cassette 1 back in place securely.

6 Press the specified position to close left cover 1.

Cassette 2

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2.

1 Open left cover 3.


10

10-17


Troubleshooting




6 Close left cover 3.

Optional Cassettes 3 and 4

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassettes 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.

1 Open left cover 4.



10-18

3 Pull out the cassette in use.

Troubleshooting


5 Push the cassette back in place securely.

6 Close left cover 4.

Multi Purpose Tray

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray.

1 Remove all papers from the multi purpose tray.

10

2 If paper is jammed inside, pull the paper toward you to remove.

10-19

Troubleshooting




5 Open the feed guide B1.



10-20


Troubleshooting

8 Turn the lower green knob (B2) to the left at least

10 times.


If you cannot remove the paper, proceed with the next step.

10

10 Pull out paper feed unit (B3).

10-21

Troubleshooting

11 Open paper feed unit cover (B4) and remove the jammed paper.

12 Push paper feed unit (B3) back in place, and push the cassette back in place securely.


Inside the Left Covers 1, 3 and 4

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside left cover 1, 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.

1 Open the left cover where the paper is jammed inside.



3 Close the left cover.

10-22

Troubleshooting

Duplex Unit

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the duplex unit.

1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover.



10

10-23

Troubleshooting

Duplex Unit and Cassette 1

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in duplex unit and cassette 1.

1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover.



4 If the left cover 2 indicator is flashing, open left cover 2.

10-24

Troubleshooting



6 Close the left cover 2.

7 Pull out cassette 1 and remove the jammed paper.



10

10-25

Troubleshooting

Fixing unit

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the fixing unit.



3 Open the fuser cover (A1).

CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting burned.

10-26

Troubleshooting



5 If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.

6 Push fuser cover back in place, and press the specified position to close left cover 1.

10

10-27

Troubleshooting

Optional Document Processor

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor.

1 Remove the original from the original tray.

2 Open the document processor top cover.

3 Remove the jammed original.

If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from inside the machine.

If the original is difficult to remove, turn the dial. The original will scroll out to a position where it can be removed easily.


10-28

4 Lift up reverse unit.

Troubleshooting

5 Remove the jammed original.


6 Put reverse unit back in its original place and close the document processor top cover.

7 Reload the originals on the document processor tray.

Optional Document Finisher

If a misfeed occurs in the optional document finisher, refer to the respective Operation Guides to clear the jam .

Optional Job Separator

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional job separator.

1 If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection slot of the job separator, pull it toward your side to remove it.


10

10-29

Troubleshooting

2 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open left cover 1.

3 Press the lever and open the job separator.



5 Press the indicated position to close left cover 1.

10-30

11 Management

This chapter explains the following operations.

•

User Login Administration.................................................................11-2

•

Job Accounting ...............................................................................11-14

•

Data Security Kit Operations...........................................................11-27

11-1

Management

User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct login user name and password for user authentication to login.

Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified only by the machine administrator.

First User Login Administration

Follow these steps for the first user login administration.

Enable user login administration. (

page 11-2

)



Add a user.(

page 11-5

)



Log out.( page 11-4 )



The registered user logs in for operations.( page 11-3 )

Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:

Item

Local Authentication

Network Authentication

Description

User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine.

User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.

Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.


2 Press [User Login/Job Accounting].

3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name and password and then press [Login].

For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-5 for

the default login user name and password.

4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting and then

[Change] of User Login .

11-2

Management

User Login/Job Accounting - User Login

User login administration.

Select authentication method.

Off

Host Name

Local

Authentication

Network

Authentication

Expansion

Authentication

Domain Name

Server Type

NTLM Kerberos

# Keys

5 Select [Local Authentication] or [Network

Authentication]. Select [Off] to disable user login administration.

If you select [Network Authentication], enter the host name (62 characters or less) and domain name (256 characters or less) for the

Authentication Server. Select [NTLM] or [Kerberos] as the server type.

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

NOTE: If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.

• Network Authentication setting of the machine

• User property of the Authentication Server

• Date and time setting of the machine and the

Authentication Server

If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator registered in the local user list and correct the settings.

If the server type is [Kerberos], only domain names entered in uppercase will be recognized.

6 Press [OK].

Login/Logout

Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

Login

Use the procedure below to login.

Enter login user name and password.

Local Login to:

Login

User Name abcdef

Login

Password

********

# Keys

1 If the screen below appears during the operations, press [Login User Name].


2 Enter the login user name and press [OK].

# Keys

NOTE: Refer to the


Appendix-7


Check Counter

IC Card

Login

Login

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Cancel

3 Press [Login Password].

Press [# keys] to enter the login data using the numeric keys.

11

11-3

Logout

Management

4 Enter the login password and press [OK].

NOTE: If Job Accounting is enabled, you can browse the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned by pressing [Check Counter].

If Network Authentication is selected as the user authentication method, either Local or Network can be selected as the authentication destination.

5 Check the login user name and password are correct, and press [Login].

To log out the machine, press the Logout key to return to the login user name/login password entry screen.

Auto Logout

Logout is automatically executed in the following cases:

• When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep mode

• When auto sleep is activated

• When auto panel reset is activated

• When auto low power mode is activated

• When low power mode is activated by pressing the

Energy Saver key.

11-4

Management

Adding a User

This adds a new user. You can add Up to 1,000 users (including the default login user name). The table below explains the user information to be registered.

Item

User Name*

Login User Name*

Login Password*

Access Level*

Account Name

E-mail Address

*

Description

Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user name cannot be registered.

Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters).

Select Administrator or User for user access privileges.

Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her account name, can login without entering the account ID. Refer to

Job Accounting on page 11-14

.

The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.

Mandatory at user registration.

NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored. Each user's properties are:

Machine Administrator

User Name: DeviceAdmin

Login User Name: 25/25 ppm model : 2500, 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 40/40 ppm model : 4000,

50/40 ppm model : 5000, 55/50 ppm model : 5500

Login Password: 25/25 ppm model : 2500, 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 40/40 ppm model : 4000,

Access Level:

50/40 ppm model : 5000, 55/50 ppm model : 5500

Machine Administrator

Administrator

User Name: Admin

Login User Name: Admin

Login Password: Admin

Access Level: Administrator

It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your security.

Use the procedure below to register a new user.

1 Login as a user with administrator rights.





11

11-5

Management

User:

User Name:

01 User

Login User Name:

0099

Access Level:

User

E-mail Address: [email protected]

Change

Change

Change

Change

Login Password:

**********

Account Name:

02 Account

IC Card Information:

Empty

Change

Change

Change



5 Press [Next] of User Login Setting , [Register/Edit] of Local User List , and then [Add].

6 Press [Change] of User Name .

7 Enter the user name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the


Appendix-7


8 Enter the login user name and E-mail address following 6 and 7 above.

Cancel Register

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

User: - Account Name

Select account to which this user will be attached.

Sort Name

Account ID Account Name

01 Account

02 Account

03 Account

04 Account

05 Account

00001000

00002000

00003000

00004000

00005000

Detail

Cancel

Status

1/2

Search(Name)

Search(ID)

Other Account

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

9 Press [Change] of Login Password and then

[Password].

10 Enter the login password and press [OK].

11 Press [Confirm Password].

12 Enter the same login password to confirm and press [OK].

13 Press [OK].

14 Press [Change] of Access Level .

15 Select the user access privilege and press [OK].

16 Press [Change] of Account Name .

17 Select the account and press [OK].

NOTE: Select [Name] and [ID] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the account list.

Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.

18 Press [Register] to add a new user on the local user list.

11-6

Management

Changing User Properties

User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user access privilege.

For a user with administrator rights who logs in

User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.

Use the procedure below to change the user properties.







4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting and [Register/

Edit] of Local User List .

5 Select the user whose properties you wish to change.

User:

User Name:

01 User

Login User Name:

0099

Access Level:

User


Change

Change

Change

Change

Login Password:

**********

Account Name:

02 Account


Empty

Change

Change

Change

NOTE: Select [Name] and [Login Name] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the user list.

Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(Login)] to search by name or login user name.


Changing user information

1 Press [Detail].

2 Refer to steps 6 to 17 of

Adding a User

to change a user property.

3 Press [Register].

4 Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation screen. The user information is changed.

11

Cancel Register

10/10/2008 10:10

Status

11-7

Management

Deleting a user

1 Press [Delete].

2 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm deletion.

The selected user will be deleted.

NOTE: The default user with administrator rights cannot be deleted.

For a user without administrator rights who logs in

These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, and E-mail address.

Although login user name, access level, or account name cannot be changed, the users can check the present status.

Use the procedure below to change user properties.


2 Press [User Property].

3

Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User

to change user properties.

User:

User Name:

01 User

Login User Name:

0099

Access Level:

User


Change

Detail

Change

Login Password:

**********

Account Name:

02 Account


Empty

Change

Detail

Press [Detail] of Login User Name or Account

Name to check the present status.

Cancel Register

10/10/2008 10:10

Status

4 Press [Register] to finalize changed user properties.

11-8

Management

Unknown login user name Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent

IDs). If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account

ID is unknown.


Reject

Permit


The job is rejected (not printed).

The job is permitted to be printed.

Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users.







4 Press [Change] of Unknown ID Job .

5 Press [Reject] or [Permit].

6 Press [OK].

11

11-9

Management

Group Authorization Settings

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.

NOTE: To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the

authentication method in Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration on page 11-2 . Select [On] for LDAP in

Protocol Detail on page 8-75 .

Group Authorization

Use the group authorization. Use the procedure below.







4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting , [Next] of Group

Authorization Set.

, and then [Change] of Group

Authorization .

5 Press [On].

6 Press [OK].

Group List

Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage. Up to 20 groups can be individually registered. Other users and groups belong to Others .

The table below explains the group information to be registered.

Item

Group ID*

Group Name

Access Level

Print Restriction

Print Restriction (Color)

Copy Restriction

Copy Restriction (Color)

Description

Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).

Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).

Select Administrator or User for group access privileges.

Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.

Select whether or not to reject usage of the color print functions for the printer.

Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.

Select whether or not to reject usage of the color copy functions.

11-10

Management


Copy Restr. (Full Color)

Send Restriction

FAX TX Restriction

Select whether or not to reject usage of only the full color copy functions.

Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.

Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.

Storing Restr. in Box

Storing Restr. in Memory

*

Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.

Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.

For Group ID, specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows. If you are using Windows

Server 2008, check Attribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are using Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool included on the installation CD-ROM for Windows Server OS

(under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).


User Login/Job Accounting - Group List

Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage. (Maximum: 20)







4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting , [Next] of Group

Authorization Set.

, [Register/Edit] of Group List , and then [Add].

Others

Group ID Group Name

11

Add

Status

Group:xxx

Group ID: Change

Change Access Level:

Print Restriction (Color):

Copy Restriction (Color):

Change

Change

Send Restriction: Change

Status

Detail Delete

Cancel Register

2008/10/10 10:10

Group Name: Change

Change Print Restriction:

Copy Restriction:

Copy Restr. (Full Color):

Change

Change

Cancel

1/2

Register

2008/10/10 10:10

5 Press [Change] of Group ID .

6 Enter the group ID and press [OK].

7 Press [Change] of Group Name .

8 Enter the group name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the


Appendix-7


9 Press [Change] of Access Level .

11-11

Management

10 Select the user access privilege and press [OK].

11 Press [Change] of Print Restriction .

12 Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].

13 Follow steps 11 and 12 above to set Print

Restriction (Color) , Copy Restriction , Copy

Restriction (Color) , Copy Restr. (Full Color) , Send

Restriction , FAX TX Restriction , Storing Restr. in

Box , and Storing Restr. in Memory .

14 Press [Register] to add a new group on the group list.

Obtain Network User Property

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server.

NOTE: To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected

for the authentication method in Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration on page 11-2

.

The table below explains the required information to be registered.Use the procedure below.

Name 2*

Item

Server Name*

Port

Name 1*

2

3

1

E-mail Address*

Search Timeout

LDAP Security

4

Description

Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters).

Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389.

Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the

LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the

LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail address from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255 seconds).

Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the

LDAP server.

*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be same as the server name entered in the network authentication.

*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1.

*3 Name 2 can be left out. When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2 , and if the value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales .

*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address .

11-12

Management

User Login/Job Accounting - Network User Property

Get the network user information.

Off

On

LDAP Server Information:

Server Name

192.181.11.11

Port: 389 # Keys

Acquisition of User Information:

Name 1 displayName

Name 2

E-mail Address mail

Cancel

Status

30 sec.

Search

Timeout

Off

LDAP

Security

OK

10/10/2008 10:10







4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting , [Change] of

Obtain NW User Property .

5 Press [On].

6 Press [Server Name].

7 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address and press [OK].

8 Press [# keys] to enter the LDAP port number using the numeric keys.

9 Press [Name 1].

10 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed and press [OK].

11 Follow steps 9 and 10 above to set Name 2 .

12 Press [E-mail Address].

13 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail address and press [OK].

14 Press [Search Timeout] to set the amount of time to wait before time-out.

15 Press [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the time.

16 Press [LDAP Security] to select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server.

17 Select [Off], [LDAP over SSL], or [LDAPv3/TLS] and press [OK].

11

11-13

Management

Job Accounting

Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account.

Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.

• Manageability of up to 1,000 individual accounts.

• Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.

• Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.

• Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.

• Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.

• Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.

First Job Accounting Setup

Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.

Enable job accounting. (

page 11-14 )



Add an account. ( page 11-16

)



Log out. ( page 11-15

)



Other users login for operations. ( page 11-15

)

Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting

Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting.







4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting , and then

[Change] of Job Accounting .

5 Press [On]. To disable job accounting, press [Off].

11-14

Management

6 Press [OK].

NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the Account ID.

Login/Logout

If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

Use the procedure below to login and logout.

Login

1 In the screen below, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and press [Login].

Enter the account ID.

Status

Check Counter

********

Login

10/10/2008 10:10

NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the

Clear key and enter the account ID again.

If the entered account ID does not match the registered

ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.

By pressing [Counter Check], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages scanned.

When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears

If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. (Refer to

Login/Logout on page 11-3 .) If the user has already

registered the account information, the account ID entry

would be skipped. (Refer to Adding a User on page 11-

5 .)

2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.

Logout

When the operations are complete, press the Logout key to return to the account ID entry screen.

11

11-15

Management

Adding an Account

This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required.

Item

Account Name

Account ID

Restriction

Description

Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and

99999999).

This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to

load. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-18 .

Use the procedure below to register a new account.

Account: xx

Account Name:

01 Account

Account ID:

00001000

Copy Restriction (Total):

Off


Off

Copy Restr. (SingleColor):

Off

Change

Change

Change

Change

Change

Print Restriction (Total):

Off

Print Restr. (Full Color):

Off

Change

Change

1/2

Cancel Register

10/10/2008 10:10







4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting , [Register/

Edit] of Accounting List , and then [Add].

5 Press [Change] of Account Name .

6 Enter the account name and press [OK]. The

Account screen reappears.

NOTE: Refer to the


Appendix-7


Status

7 Follow steps 5 and 6 above to enter the Account ID .

NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.

8 Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to

Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-18

.

9 Press [Register] to add a new account on the

Account List.

11-16

Management

Managing Accounts

This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.

Use the procedure below to manage accounts.







4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then

[Register/Edit] of Accounting List .

5 Select an account to change or delete.

User Login/Job Accounting - Accounting List

Register an account that is permitted to use this machine. (Maximum: 1000)

01

Account Name

Account

02 Account

03 Account

Sort Name

00001000

Account ID

00002000

00003000 1/2

04 Account

05 Account

00004000

00005000

Detail Delete

Search(Name)

Search(ID)

Add

NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the account names.



Close

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Account: xx

Account Name:

01 Account

Account ID:

00001000

Copy Restriction (Total):

Off


Off

Copy Restr. (SingleColor):

Off

Change

Change

Change

Change

Change

Print Restriction (Total):

Off

Print Restr. (Full Color):

Off

Change

Change

1/2

Changing account information

1 Press [Detail].

2 Refer to steps 5 to 7 of Adding an Account and steps 2 to 5 of Restricting Using the Machine to change account information.

3 Press [Register].

4 Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation screen. The account information is changed.

Cancel Register

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Deleting an account

1 Press [Delete].

2 Press [Yes]. To delete the account.

11

11-17

Management

Managing the Copier/Printer Counts

You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to

Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-18 ,

Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11-23 and

Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-26 for details.

Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.







4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting , [Next] of

Default Setting and then [Change] of Copier/Printer

Count.

5 Press [Total] or [Split].

6 Press [OK].

Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.

The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for

Managing the

Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-18 .

Restriction Items

 [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count

Item Detail

Copy Restriction (Total)

Copy Restr. (Full Color) Limits the number of sheets used for full-color copying.

Copy Restr. (SingleColor) Limits the number of sheets used for single-color copying.

Print Restriction (Total)

Limits the total number of sheets used for full-color, singlecolor, and black and white copying.

Limits the total number of sheets used for color and black and white printing.

Print Restr. (Full Color) Limits the number of sheets used for color printing.

Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

11-18

Management

Item

FAX TX Restriction

FAX Port Restriction

Detail

Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.

Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are installed.

 [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count

Item Detail


Print Restr. (Full Color)

Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

Limits the number of sheets used for full-color printing.

Print Restr. (SingleCol.) Limits the number of sheets used for single-color printing.

Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.

FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two optional FAX kits are installed.

Applying Restriction

Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows:

Item

Off

Counter Limit

Reject Usage

Description

No restriction given

Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to

9,999,999 copies.

Restriction is applied.

*Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the FAX Port Restriction setting.

Use the procedure below to select a restriction method.

1

Follow steps 1 to 4 of Adding an Account on page

11-16 .

2 Press [Change] for the item to be restricted.

11

11-19

Account:** - Copy Restriction (Total)

Restrict use of the functions.

Limit

Off

Counter Limit

Reject Usage

(1 - 9999999)

99999 page(s)

3 Select the restriction mode.

Management

If [Counter Limit] is selected, press [+],[-] or numeric keys to select the number of pages.

Cancel

Status

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

4 Press [OK].

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other accounts to be restricted.

6 Press [Register]. The restricted account is added.

Applying Limit of Restriction

This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below describes the action taken.


*

Immediately *

Subsequently

Alert Only

Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.

Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected.

Job continues while displaying an alert message.

The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit.








Default Setting and then [Change] of Apply Limit .

5 Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert

Only].

6 Press [OK].

11-20

Management

Default Counter Limit

When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used.

You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments.

The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for

Managing the Copier/

Printer Counts on page 11-18 .

Available Settings

 [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count

Item Detail

Copy Restriction (Total)

Copy Restr. (Full Color)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color and black and white copying.

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color copying.

Copy Restr. (SingleColor) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for single-color copying.

Print Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for color and black and white printing.

Print Restr. (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color printing.

Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.

 [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count

Item Detail


Print Restr. (Full Color)

Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color printing.

Print Restr. (SingleCol.) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for single-color printing.

Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.

11

11-21

Management

Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits.

User Login/Job Accounting - Copy Restriction (Total)

Set the default limit value for restricting use of the functions for each account by counter.

(1 - 9999999)

9999999



3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and password, and press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

Refer to Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default

login user name and password.


Default Setting and then [Next] of Default Counter

Limit .

5 Press [Change] for the item you want to modify and then press [+] or [-] or use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets.

6 Press [OK].

7 To set another default restriction, repeat steps 5 to

6.

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Status

11-22

Management

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job

Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.

Types of the counts are as follows.

Item Detail

Printed Pages

Scanned Pages

Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can also use [Count by Paper Size] and

[Count by Duplex/Combine] to check the number of pages used.

• For copying, you can check the pages used for black and white, full-color and single-color copying as well as the total pages used.

• For printing, you can check the pages used for black and white and full-color printing as well as the total pages used.

• You can use [Count by Paper Size] to check the number of pages used in the paper size set in

Counting by Paper Size on page 11-25 as well as the number of pages used in other paper

sizes.

• You can use the [Count by Duplex/Combine] to check the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode, Duplex (2sided) mode and the total for both, as well as the pages used in

Combine (None) mode, Combine (2in1) mode, Combine (4in1) mode and the total for all three.

Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.

FAX Transmission Pages* Displays the number of pages faxed.

FAX Transmission Time* Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.

* Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.

Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter

This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.

Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter.







11

11-23

Management

User Login/Job Accounting - Total Job Accounting

Printed Pages: Check Scanned Pages:

FAX Transmission Pages:

2

Counter Reset: Execute

FAX Transmission Time:

00:00:10

Check


[Next] of Total Job Accounting .

5 Press [Check] at the function to check the count.

The results will be displayed.

6 Confirm the count and press [Close].

7 Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the counter.

8 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The counter is reset.

Close

10/10/2008 10:10

Status

Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account.

Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter.







4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and [Check] of Each Job Accounting .

5 Select the account to check the count.

User Login/Job Accounting - Each Job Accounting

Maintain a separate counter for each account (department).

Account Name

06 Account 00006000

Sort Name

Account ID

2/2

Search(Name)

Search(ID)

NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down menu to sort the account names.


Detail

6 Press [Detail].

Close

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

11-24

Management

Account:

Printed Pages:

FAX Transmission Pages:

2(20)

Counter Reset:

Check

Execute

Scanned Pages:

FAX Transmission Time:

0:00:10

Check

7 Press [Check] at the function to check the count.

The results will be displayed.

8 Confirm the count and press [Close].

9 Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the counter.

10 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The counter will be reset.

Close

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

Counting by Paper Size

This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).

NOTE: Paper size is available in five types, - 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports. Refer to

Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-26 .

In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If no media type is specified, usage is counted for all media types of that size.

Use the procedure below to count the number of pages.








Default Setting , [Change] of Count by Paper Size ,

[Change] of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then [On].

User Login/Job Accounting - Paper Size 1

Select the paper sizes and types to count.

Off

On

A3

A5

B5

A4

B4

Folio

5 Select the paper size.

6 Press [Media Type] to specify media type.

7 Select the media type and press [OK].

8 Press [Close].

Ledger Legal

Letter Statement

Plain

Media Type

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

11

11-25

Management

Printing an Accounting Report

Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.

Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.

When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count

ACCOUNT.REPORT

xxxxxxxxxx


For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.

Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.

1 Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the cassette.








[Print] of Print Accounting Report .

6 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the printing.

11-26

Management

Unknown Account ID Jobs

The behavior of the machine when it receives a job from unknown account ID (i.e. unsent ID) can be specified.

Refer to Unknown login user name Job on page 11-9 for details.

Checking and Printing Counter

Counter

Printed Pages

Black&White:

Full Color:

SingleColor:

Total:

Copy

300

200

100

600

Printer

600

500

100

1200

FAX

100

100

0

200

Total

Scanned Pages

Copy

Originals:

Print

Status Page

600

Printed Pages by Paper Size

FAX

200

Others

1000

Total

1800

Close

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

1000

800

200

2000

Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets printed and scanned.

You can check the number of pages printed in each paper size by pressing [Printed Pages by Paper Size].

Data Security Kit Operations

Installing the optional Data Security Kit adds [Data Security] on the System Menu.

Refer to the Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide on the bundled CD-ROM for descriptions of the [Data

Security] options and the procedures for using them.

11

11-27

11-28

Management

Appendix

•

Optional Equipment ...............................................................Appendix-2

•

Character Entry Method.........................................................Appendix-7

•

Paper ...................................................................................Appendix-10

•

Specifications.......................................................................Appendix-18

•

Glossary...............................................................................Appendix-28

Appendix-1

Optional Equipment

Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

Document Processor


(Dual scan DP)

Document Table

3,000 Sheet


Document Finisher Paper Feeder

3,000 Sheet

Paper Feeder

Appendix-2

Job Separator

Key Counter

FAX Kit

Appendix-3

Expansion Memory


Paper Feeder

3,000 Sheet Paper Feeder


3,000 Sheet Document Finisher

Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.

For document processor operation, refer to

Loading

Originals in the Document Processor on page 2-34

.

Two additional cassettes identical to the printer’s double cassettes can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 and 2.

NOTE: Left cover 4 is located on the left side of the paper feeder for use in clearing paper jams.

In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install an optional 3,000 sheet paper feeder capable of holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4 or B5 paper.

NOTE: The 3,000 sheet paper feeder features a removable cover on the left side of the feeder (left cover 4) for removing paper when a paper jam occurs.

The document finisher holds a large quantity of finished copies. The finisher offers a convenient means of sorting. Sorted finished copies may also be stapled. For further details, refer to the document finisher Operation

Guide .

This is a large-capacity document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.

For details, refer to the 3,000 Sheet Document Finisher

Operation Guide . A mail box and folding unit are also available as options.

Appendix-4

Job Separator

Key Counter

Inserting the Key Counter

Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs.

Or, specify as the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the received fax data.

There is a paper indicator in the front of the machine that shows whether there is paper in the Job Separator.

CAUTION: Note that some paper types have a tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.

If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly, turn the paper in the cassette over and try again.

NOTE:

• To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job

Separator, select the output destination or change the default setting. (For details, refer to the

Paper

Output on page 8-14 .)

• When removing paper from the Job Separator, pull it out at an angle.

Use the key counter to monitor machine usage. The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized management of copy volume for different departments in a large company.

Insert the key counter securely into the key counter slot.

NOTE: When the key counter function is activated, copies can only be made when a key counter is inserted. If the key counter is not inserted, Insert key counter . will be displayed.

Appendix-5

FAX Kit

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time can be reduced. For further details, refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide .

Expansion Memory

Image storage memory (128 MB) that allows the machine to receive more pages of incoming faxed originals.

Expansion memory should only be installed or removed by the service representative.

Data Security Kit

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved. The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.

Printed Document Guard Kit

This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank, prohibiting transmission.

Document Table

Place original or other documents when using the machine. It has a drawer to accommodate clips.

Appendix-6

Character Entry Method

To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.

NOTE: QWERTY , QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard.

Press the System Menu key, [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Keyboard Layout to choose desired layout. QWERTY layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.

Entry Screens

Lower-case Letter Entry Screen

1

6


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 !

= q a w s e d r f t g y h u j i k o l p

;

[

:

]

^

Backspace

\ z x c v b

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol n m ,

Space

.

/

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

7 8 9 10 11

2

3

4

5

7

8

5

6

9

No.

Display/Key

3

4

1

2

Display

Limit Display

Cursor Key

[Backspace]

Keyboard

[Upper-case]

[Lower-case]

[No./Symbol]

[Space]

Description

Displays entered characters.

Displays maximum number of characters.

Press to move the cursor on the display.

Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor.

Press a character to enter.

Press to use upper-case letters.

Press to use lower-case letters,

Press to enter numbers and symbols.

Press to insert a space.

Appendix-7

No.

Display/Key

10 [Cancel]

11 [OK]

Description

Press to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before the entry.

Press to finalize entry and return to the screen before the entry.

Upper-case Letter Entry Screen


!

Q

@

W

#

E

$

R

%

T

^

Y

&

U

*

I

A S D F G H J

(

K

O

L

)

P

:

_

{

+

}

"

˜

|

Backspace

C > ?

Z

Upper-case

X V B

No./Symbol

N M <

Space

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

Number/Symbol Entry Screen


1

$

;

2

%

<

| }

Upper-case

3

&

=

˜

’

4

>

5

(

?

No./Symbol

6

)

@

7

*

[

8

+

\

,

9

]

-

0

^

!

.

_

Space

Cancel

Status

"

/

`

#

:

{

Backspace

OK

10/10/2008 10:10

12

No.

Display/Key

12 [ ]/[ ]

Description

To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard, press the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to enter.

Appendix-8

Entering Characters

Follow the steps shown below to enter List A-1 for example.

1 Press [Upper-case].

2 Press [L]. The letter L is shown on the display.


L

Backspace

!

Q

@

W

#

E

$

R

%

T

^

Y

&

U

*

I

A S D F G H J K

(

O

L

)

P

:

_

{

"

+

}

˜

|

Z

Upper-case

X C V B

No./Symbol

N M <

Space

> ?

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

3 Press [Lower-case].

4 Press [i], [s], [t] and [Space].


List

1 q a

2 w

3 e s d

4 r f

5 t g

6 y h

7 u j

8 i k

9 o

0 p

!

[

=

] l ; ’

`

\

Backspace z x c v b

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol n m ,

Space

.

/ @ _

Status

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10

5 Press [Upper-case].

6 Press [A].

7 Press [No./Symbol].

8 Press [ ] or [ ] repeatedly to view the keyboard containing [-] and [1].

9 Press [-] and [1].


List_A-1

Backspace

1 2

$

;

| }

Upper-case

%

<

3

&

=

˜

4

’

>

5

(

?

6

)

@

7

*

[

8

+

\

9

,

]

0

-

^

!

.

_

"

/

`

#

:

{

No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

10/10/2008 10:10 Status

10 Check that the entry is correct. Press [OK].

Appendix-9

Paper

This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.

Cassettes 1

Supported types

Plain paper (60 to 163 g/m 2 )

Recycled paper (60 to 163 g/m 2 )



Supported paper sizes

Letter, Letter-R, Statement, A4, A4-R, B5,

B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 16K, 16K-R

Ledger, Legal, A3, B4, Oficio II,

8.5 × 13.5", 8K

No. of sheets

500 (80 g/m 2 )

250 (80 g/m 2 )

Cassettes 2 and the optional paper feeder

Supported types




Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement,

A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Oficio II,

8.5 × 13.5", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

No. of sheets

500 (80 g/m 2 )

Optional 3,000 sheet paper feeder


Letter, A4, B5

No. of sheets

3,000 (80 g/m 2 )

Supported types



Multi Purpose tray (MP tray)

Supported types



Colored paper (60 to 220 g/m 2 )



Colored paper (60 to 220 g/m 2 )

Postcards

Oufuku Hagaki (return postcard)


Letter, Letter-R, Executive-R, Statement,

A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R,

Folio, 16K, 16K-R

Other sizes:

Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm

Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm

Ledger, Legal, A3, B4, Oficio II,

8.5 × 13.5", 8K

No. of sheets

100 (80 g/m 2 )

50 (80 g/m 2 )

Postcards (100 × 148 mm)

Return postcard (148 × 200 mm)

30

Appendix-10

Envelopes

Supported types

Transparency (OHP film)


Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,

Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),

Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),

Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),

Monarch, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4

Other sizes:

Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm

Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm

Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R

10

10

No. of sheets

Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.

Supported Paper

Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.

Basic Paper Specifications

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections for further details.

Weight

Criteria

Thickness

Dimensional accuracy

Squareness of corners

Moisture content

Grain direction

Pulp content

Specifications

Cassettes: 60 to 163 g/m

2

Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m

2

0.086 to 0.110 mm

±0.7 mm

90° ±0.2°

4 to 6%

Long grain (paper supply direction)

80% or more

NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic

Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.

We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.

Appendix-11

Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Condition

Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.

Ingredient

Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon.

These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.

Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content consists of cotton or other fibers.

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.

Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.


A6-R (105 × 148 mm)

B6-R (128 × 182 mm)

Hagaki (100×148mm)

Oufuku Hagaki (148 × 200 mm)

Executive (7 1/4 ×10 1/2")

Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)

Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm)

Envelope C4 (229 × 324mm)

ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)

Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2")

Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8")

Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2")

Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 ×7 1/2")

Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)

Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)

Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray

A3 (297 × 420 mm)

B4 (257 × 364 mm)

A4 (297 × 210 mm)

A4-R (210 × 297 mm)

B5 (257 × 182 mm)

B5-R (182 × 257 mm)

A5-R (148 × 210 mm)

Folio (210 × 330 mm)

Ledger

Legal

Letter

Letter-R

Statement-R

Oficio II

8.5 × 13.5"

Appendix-12


Size Entry (98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm)

Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray

8K (273 × 394 mm)

16K (273 × 197 mm)

16K-R (197 × 273 mm)

Smoothness

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.

Basis Weight

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight

(i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.

Thickness

Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm.

Moisture Content

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between

4 to 6%.

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for a while.

• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.

• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.

• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

Appendix-13

Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.

Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.

Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.

Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you cut the paper yourself.

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.

Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.

• Glossy paper

• Watermarked paper

• Paper with an uneven surface

• Perforated paper

Special Paper

This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

The following paper and media can be used.

• Transparencies

• Preprinted paper

• Bond paper

• Recycled paper

• Thin paper (from 60 g/m

2

to 64 g/m

2

or less)

• Letterhead

• Colored paper

• Prepunched paper

• Envelopes

• Cardstocks (Hagaki)

• Thick paper (from 106 g/m

2

to 200 g/m

2

or less)

• Labels

• Coated paper

• High-quality paper

When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper.

Appendix-14

Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.

Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.

Transparencies

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.

Criteria

Heat resistance

Thickness

Material

Dimensional accuracy

Squareness of corners

Specifications

Must withstand at least 190°C

0.100 to 0.110 mm

Polyester

±0.7 mm

90° ±0.2°

To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the machine.

If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.

Hagaki

Burrs

Burrs

Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki may cause jams.

Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki (available at post offices).

Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.

Envelopes

Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes.

Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases.

Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are ready to use them.

Appendix-15

Keep the following points in mind.

Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes off in the machine.

Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.

If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.

To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in the output tray at once.

Thick Paper

Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.

NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray with the leading edge raised a few millimeters.

Label

Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.

For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.

When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.

Top sheet

Adhesive layer

Carrier sheet

Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected by the force applied in the machine.

The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of labels may cause more problems.

The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels, resulting in a serious failure.

Appendix-16

Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the carrier sheet before completing output.

Allowed Not allowed

Top sheet

Carrier sheet

Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.

Item

Top sheet weight

Basis weight

(overall paper weight)

Top sheet thickness

Overall paper thickness

Moisture content

Specifications

44 to 74 g/m²

104 to 151 g/m²

0.086 to 0.107 mm

0.115 to 0.145 mm

4 to 6 % (composite)

Colored Paper

Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix. In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).

Preprinted Paper

Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix. The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.

NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality.

Appendix-17

Specifications

NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Machine

Item

Type

Printing Method

Supported Original Types

Paper Size

Zoom Level

Multi Purpose

Tray

Cassette

1, 2

Multi Purpose

Tray

Description

Desktop

Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system

Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: 11 × 17"/

A3)

Fixed

60 to 163 g/m 2 (Duplex: 60 to 163 g/m 2 )

Original Feed System

Paper Weight Cassette

1, 2

Paper Type

Multi Purpose

Tray

Cassette

1, 2

60 to 220 g/m

2

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),

Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex:

Same as Simplex)

Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,

Thick, Coated, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Maximum: 11 × 17"/A3 (Duplex: 11 × 17"/A3)

Minimum: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A5R (Duplex: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A5R)

Maximum: 11 × 17"/A3

Minimum: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A6R

Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom

Appendix-18

Item

Printing

Speed

First Print

Time

(A4, feed from

Cassette)

25/25 ppm model

30/30 ppm model

40/40 ppm model

50/40 ppm model

55/50 ppm model

Black and

White

Full color

Description

A4/Letter

Black and White copying Full color copying

25 sheets/min

A4-R/Letter-R 17 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

17 sheets/min

A3/Ledger

B4/Legal

B5

13 sheets/min

13 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

13 sheets/min

13 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

A4/Letter 30 sheets/min


A3/Ledger 15 sheets/min

B4/Legal

B5

A4/Letter

15 sheets/min

30 sheets/min

40 sheets/min

30 sheets/min

20 sheets/min

15 sheets/min

15 sheets/min

30 sheets/min

40 sheets/min



B4/Legal

B5

19 sheets/min

40 sheets/min

27 sheets/min

19 sheets/min

19 sheets/min

40 sheets/min

A4/Letter

A3/Ledger

B4/Legal

50 sheets/min


25 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

40 sheets/min

27 sheets/min

19 sheets/min

19 sheets/min

40 sheets/min B5 50 sheets/min

When the Document Finisher is not installed:

When the 3,000 Sheet Document Finisher is installed:

A4/Letter 55 sheets/min 50 sheets/min


A3/Ledger

B4/Legal

B5

B4/Legal

B5

28 sheets/min

28 sheets/min

55 sheets/min

When the Document Finisher is installed:

A4/Letter 50 sheets/min



28 sheets/min

50 sheets/min

33 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

50 sheets/min

50 sheets/min

33 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

25 sheets/min

50 sheets/min

25/25 ppm model: 6.2 seconds or less










Appendix-19

Item

Warm-up Time

(22°C/71.6°F,

60%)

Power on

Low Power

Description

25/25 ppm model: 30 seconds or less










Paper

Capacity

Resolution

Operating

Environment

Sleep

Cassette 1

Cassette 2

Multi Purpose

Tray

Output Tray

Capacity

Top tray with optional job separator

Continuous Copying

Image Write System

Main Memory Standard

Hard Disk

Interface

Maximum

Standard






500 sheets (80 g/m

250 sheets (80 g/m

500 sheets (80 g/m

100 sheets (80 g/m

50 sheets (80 g/m 2

250 sheets (80 g/m

150 sheets (80 g/m

2

2

2

2

2

)

, A4/Letter or less),

, more than Letter/A4)

2

)

)

, A4/Letter or less),

, B4/Legal or more)

1 to 999 sheets

Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

2048 MB

2048 MB

25/25:80GB or more (standard)





USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)

USB memory slot: 2 (Full-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)

Option KUIO/W slot: 2

600 × 600 dpi

Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Humidity 15 to 80 %

Altitude

Brightness

2,500 m/8,202 ft maximum

1,500 lux maximum

Appendix-20

Item

Dimension (W × D × H)

(Main unit only)

Weight (without toner container and waste toner box)

Space Required (W × D)

(Using multi purpose tray)

Power Source

Options

Description

23 53/64 × 26 49/64 × 29 11/32"

605 × 680 × 745 mm

233.7 lb/106 kg

35 × 26 49/64"

889 × 680 mm

120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A/220 to 240 V AC, 50 Hz/ 60 Hz, 7.2 A

Document processor, Paper feeder, 3,000 sheet paper feeder,

Document finisher, 3,000 sheet document finisher, Job separator, Key counter, FAX kit, Expansion memory, Data Security Kit, Printed

Document Guard Kit

Printer

Item

Printing Speed

First Print

Time

(A4, feed from

Cassette)

Black and

White

Full color

Resolution

Operating System

Interface Standard

Page Description Language

Description

Same as Copying Speed.

25/25 ppm model : 9.4 seconds or less










600 dpi

Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP, Windows Server

2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7 , Windows Server 2008, Apple

Macintosh OS 10.x

USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)

PRESCRIBE

Appendix-21

Scanner

Item

System requirements

Resolution

File Format

Scanning Speed

Interface

Network Protocol

Transmission

System

*1

Description

CPU: 600Mhz or higher

RAM: 128MB or more

600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi

(Resolution in FAX mode included)

TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), PDF (high compression)

25/25 ppm model

30/30 ppm model

1-sided B/W 50 Images/min

Color 50 Images/min

40/40 ppm model

50/40 ppm model

55/50 ppm model


Color 60 Images/min

(A4 landscape, 300 dpi,

Image quality: Text/Photo original)


Color 75 Images/min


Color 100 Images/min

(A4 landscape, 300 dpi,

Image quality: Text/Photo original)

Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)

TCP/IP

PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB

FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL

E-mail transmission SMTP Scan to E-mail

TWAIN scan*

WIA scan*

3

2

*1 When using the dual scan document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)

*2 Available Operating System : Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,

Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008

*3 Available Operating System : Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008

Appendix-22

Document Processor (option)

Item

Original Feed

Method

Supported

Original Types

Paper Size

Automatic feed

Sheet originals

Description

Paper Weight

Loading Capacity

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

Weight

Maximum: Ledger/A3

Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R

45 to 160 g/m

2

100 sheets (50 to 80 g/m

2

) maximum

Mixed original sizes (auto selection): 30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m

2

) maximum

22 23/32 × 21 13/64 × 7 5/64"

577 × 534 × 180 mm

14 kg or less

Dual scan DP model: 14 kg or less

Paper Feeder (option)

Item

Paper Supply

Method

Paper Size

Description

Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m

2

, 2 cassettes)

Supported Paper

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

Weight

Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Executive, Executive-R,

Statement-R, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

Paper weight: 60 - 163 g/m

2

Media types: standard, recycled, color

23 1/32 × 24 1/2 × 12 13/32"

585 × 622.5 × 315 mm

Approx. 45.2 lbs. / Approx. 20.5 kg

3,000 Sheet Paper Feeder (option)

Item

Paper Supply

Method

Paper Size

Supported Paper

Description

Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 3,000 (80 g/m

2

))

A4, B5, Letter


2

Media types: standard, recycled, color

Appendix-23

Item

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

Weight

23 5/16 × 23 5/8 × 12 23/64"

585 × 600 × 314 mm

Approx. 50.71 lbs / Approx. 23 kg

Document Finisher (option)

Description

Item

Number of Trays

Paper Size

(Non-stapling)

Supported Paper

Weight

Maximum Sheets for Stapling

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

Weight

Description

1 tray

Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", A3, B4, Folio, 8K: 500 sheets

Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, 16K: 1,000 sheets

Stapling: 90 g/m

2

or less

Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", A3, B4, 8K: 25 sheets

Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, 16K: 50 sheets (Paper weight 90 g/m

2 or less)

25 × 20 63/64 × 40 5/16"

634.9 × 533 × 1013.5 mm

Approx. 58.42 lbs. / Approx. 26.5 kg

3,000 Sheet Document Finisher (option)

Item

Number of Trays

Paper

Size

Tray A

(Non-

Stapling)

Tray B

3 trays

Description

Ledger, Legal, A3, B4, 8K: 1,500 sheets

Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4R, B5, 16K: 3,000 sheets

Tray C

Supported Paper

Weight

Maximum Sheets for Stapling

Folio, Ledger, Legal, 12×18", A3, B4, 8K: 100 sheets

Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 16K, 16KR: 200 sheets

Letter, Statement-R, A4, B5, A5, A5R, 16K: 50 sheets

Stapling: 90 g/m

2

or less

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

Weight

A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Folio, 8K: 30 sheets

A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K: 50 sheets

(Paper weight 90 g/m

2

or less)

27 1/2 × 22 9/16 × 42 13/16"

687 × 573 × 1087mm

121.3 lbs or less / 55 kg or less

Appendix-24

Job Separator (option)

Item

Number of Trays

Maximum Sheets

Paper Size

Paper Type

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

Weight

Description

1 tray

100 sheets (80 g/m

2

)

Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Executive, Executive-R,

Statement-R, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R


2

Paper type: plain, recycled, color, vellum

22 29/64 × 22 29/64 × 9 26/64"

570 × 570 × 240 mm

5.1 lbs. or less / 2.3 kg or less

Appendix-25

Environmental Specifications

( 25/25 ppm model and 30/30 ppm model )


25/25 ppm model 30/30 ppm model

Nose emission During copying

Power consumption*

1

During copying

Black & White 66.2 dB(A) (Lwad) 67.1 dB(A) (Lwad)

Color 66.4 dB(A) (Lwad) 67.0 dB(A) (Lwad)

Black & White 710 W or less

(120V)

760 W or less

(230V)

Color

730 W or less

(120V)

790 W or less

(230V)

800 W or less

(120V)

860 W or less

(230V)

810 W or less

(120V)

870 W or less

(230V)

During stanby

During Low Power Mode

Recovery time from Low Power

Mode

160 W or less

100 W or less

30 seconds or less

Duplexing

Time to Low Power Mode

During sleep

Recovery time from sleep

Time to sleep

During Plugged-in Mode*

2

3 minutes

16 W or less

30 seconds or less

30 minutes

1W or less

Standard

*2 Power consumption in Plugged-in Mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from the outlet.

Appendix-26

Environmental Specifications

( 40/40 ppm model and 50/40 ppm model )


40/40 ppm model 50/40 ppm model

Nose emission During copying

Power consumption*

1

During copying

(with full optional equipment)

During stanby

During Low Power Mode

Recovery time from Low Power

Mode

Black & White 68.0 dB (A) (Lwad) 69.5 dB (A) (Lwad)

Color 68.2 dB (A) (Lwad) 68.3 dB (A) (Lwad)

Black & White 980 W or less

(120V)

1000 W or less

(230V)

Color

1110 W or less

(120V)

1130 W or less

(230V)

1130 W or less (120V)

1150 W or less (230V)

210 W or less

130 W or less

30 seconds or less

Duplexing

Time to Low Power Mode

During sleep

Recovery time from sleep

Time to sleep

During Plugged-in Mode*

2

3 minutes

19 W or less

45 seconds or less

45 minutes

1W or less

Standard

60 minutes

*2 Power consumption in Plugged-in Mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from the outlet.

NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.

“Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3.GPSGV, der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779”.

Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV vorgesehen.

Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren

Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.

Appendix-27

Glossary

Accessibility

The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or visually impaired. Touch panel characters can be enlarged while the touch panel is adjustable in two angles.

AppleTalk

AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk network.

Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However, no output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed.

Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing

Auto Sleep

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.

Bonjour

Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set.

Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP

Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour.

Default Gateway

This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.

Appendix-28

DHCP (IPv6)

DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.

dpi(dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).

EcoPrint Mode

A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.

Emulation

The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of PCL6, KPDL, and KPDL (automatic).

FTP(File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and

SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.

Grayscale

A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits.

Help

A Help key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.

IP Address

An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be between 0 and 255.

IPP

IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the

HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.

Appendix-29

KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.

Multi Purpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and

Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.

NetWare

Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.

PostScript

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highlyfunctional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level

3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.

PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.

Printer Driver

The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is contained in the CD-ROM enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.

RA(Stateless)

The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information is the Router Advertisement (RA). ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a

IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol

Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".

Send as E-mail

A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected from the list or entered at each time.

Appendix-30

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.

Status Page

The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source settings.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and, in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address

"133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix

(network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP setting to Off .

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other over a network.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under

IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.

TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the computers.

The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.

Appendix-31

WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices.This function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.

Appendix-32

Index

Index

Numerics

1-sided/2-sided Selection

5-10

3,000 sheet document finisher

Appendix-4

3,000 sheet paper feeder

Appendix-4

A

Accessibility

8-84, Appendix-28

Adjusting Density

5-17

Auto

3-8

Manual

3-8

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle

2-11

Adjustment/Maintenance

8-44

Auto Color Correction

8-47

Color Calibration

8-52

Color Calibration Cycle

8-50

Color Registration

8-47

Copy Density Adjustment

8-44

Correcting Fine Black Lines

8-46

Developer Refresh

8-53

Display Brightness

8-46

Drum Refresh

8-45

Gray Adjustment

8-51

Laser Scanner Cleaning

8-53

MP Tray Cleaning

8-53, 8-54

Send/Box Density

8-45

Silent Mode

8-47

System Initialization

8-46

AppleTalk

Appendix-28

Setup

2-15

Applications

8-69

Attention Indicator

1-4

Auto Image Rotation

4-37

Auto Low Power Mode 2-9

Auto Paper Selection

Appendix-28

Auto Sleep

2-10, Appendix-28

B

Background density adjust

Copy 4-35

Send 5-20

Bonjour Appendix-28

Booklet from Sheets 4-18

Left side 4-18

Right side 4-18

Top binding 4-19

Border Erase

Copy 4-16

Send 5-23

Bundled Items 2-2

Buzzer 8-3

C

Calibration Cycle 8-50

Cassette

Loading Paper 2-21

Paper Size and Media Type 8-5

Cassette 1 1-4

Cassette 2 1-4

Caution Labels

ix

CD-ROM 2-2

Centering 5-6

Changing Language 2-11, 8-2

Character Entry Method Appendix-7

Cleaning

Dual scanning area 9-3

Glass Platen 9-2

Original Cover 9-2

Separator 9-5

Slit Glass 9-3

Transfer Roller 9-6

Cleaning Brush 1-5

Clip Holder 1-4

Color

Background Density Adjust 4-35, 5-20

Color / Grayscale / Black and White

Selection 5-21

Color balance adjust 4-30

Color Calibration Cycle 8-50

Index-1

Color Profiles

5-32

Color Registration

8-47

Color Type

5-31, 8-30, 8-31

Gray Adjustment

8-51

Hue adjust

4-31

One touch image adjust

4-33

Single Color copy

4-29

Color balance adjust

4-30

Color Calibration

8-52

Color mode

3-6

Color Selection (Copy)

8-17

Color Selection (Send/Store)

8-18

Color Toner Empty Action

8-15

Color type

5-31

Combine Mode

2-in-1 Mode

4-12

4-in-1 Mode

4-12

Page Boundary Lines

4-13

Connecting

LAN Cable

2-5

Power Cable

2-6

USB Cable

2-6

Connection Method

2-3

Continuous Scan

Copy

4-36

Send

5-22

Conventions in This Guide

xxvii

Copy

Appendix-6

Adjusting Density

3-8

Collate Copying

3-14

Duplex Copying

3-12

Offset Copying

3-14

Originals

4-2

Selecting Image Quality

3-9

Setup

8-27

Zoom Copying

3-10

Copy Settings

8-27

Auto % Priority

8-28

Auto Paper Selection

8-27

Border Erase for Back Page

8-27

Paper Selection

8-27

Preset Limit

8-29

Quick Setup Registration

8-29

Reserve Next Priority

8-28

Copying Functions

4-1

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

Index-2

Index

by Paper Size 11-25

Counter 11-27

Each Job 11-24

Printing a Report 11-26

Total Job 11-23

Unknown Account ID Jobs 11-27

Counting the Number of Pages

Printed 11-23

Cover Mode 4-21

Custom Box

Creating a New Box 6-2

Deleting Documents 6-11

Editing Documents 6-8

Form Overlay 6-7

Join Documents 6-9

Move Documents 6-8

Printing Documents 6-5

Sending Documents 6-6

Storing Documents 6-4

User Privileges 3-40

D

Date/Timer 8-55

Auto Error Clear 8-58

Auto Panel Reset 8-56

Auto Sleep 8-57

Date Format 8-55

Date/Time 8-55

Low Power Timer 8-57

Setup 8-55

Time Zone 8-56

Default 8-15

Auto Image Rotation 8-22

Border Erase 8-21

Border Erase to Back Page 8-21

Collate/Offset 8-22

Color Selection (Copy) 8-17

Color Selection (Send/Store) 8-18

Color TIFF Compression Settings 8-24

Continuous Scan 8-16

Density 8-19

EcoPrint 8-23

E-mail Subject/Body 8-20

File Format 8-18, 8-19

File Name 8-20

High Comp. PDF Image

8-24

JPEG/TIFF Print

8-25

Margin

8-22

Original Image

8-17


8-16

PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image

8-23

Repeat Copying

8-24

Scan Resolution

8-17

XPS Fit to Page

8-26

Zoom

8-20

Default Gateway

Appendix-28

Default Screen

8-2

Density Adjustment

Copy

3-8

Send

5-17

Destination

8-60

Adding

8-60

Adding a contact

8-60

Adding a Group

8-62

Choosing by One Touch Key

3-32

Choosing by Speed Dial

3-32

Choosing from the Address Book

3-30

Editing

8-63

One Touch Key

8-64

Quick No. Search key

3-3

Search

3-31

Sending to Different Types of

Destinations (Multi Sending)

3-32

Device

7-16

Canceling FAX Communication

7-18

Checking Status

7-16

Configuring

7-17

Displaying Screen

7-16

USB Memory

7-17

DHCP

Appendix-28

DHCP (IPv6)

Appendix-29

Document Box

3-33, 6-1

Basic Operation

3-35

Custom Box

3-33, 6-2

Document deletion time

6-3

Form Overlay

6-7

Job Box

3-33, 6-12

Quick Setup Registration

8-33

What is Document Box?

3-33

Document Finisher

Appendix-4,

Appendix-24

Document Guard 8-81

Document Processor Appendix-4,

Appendix-23

How to Load Originals 2-35

Loading Originals 2-34

Not Supported Originals 2-34

Part Names 2-34

Supported Originals 2-34

Document Table Appendix-6

Double Copy 4-27

dpi Appendix-29

Duplex 3-12, 8-37

E

EcoPrint Mode Appendix-29

Copy 4-12

Print 8-36

E-mail

Send as E-mail 3-25

Embedded Web Server 2-17

Emulation Appendix-29

Selection 8-35

Energy Star Program

xxv

Enlarged Display 8-84

Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-26

Enter key 1-3, 3-3

Entry

Body 5-26

Document Name 5-25

File Name 4-41, 5-25

Subject 5-26

Error Handling 8-12

Error Messages 10-6

Expansion Memory Appendix-6

F

File

Format 5-12

PDF 5-14

File Name 4-41

File Separation 5-13

Form Overlay 4-22

Storing a Form 6-17

Front Cover 1-4

Index

Index-3

FTP

Appendix-29

FTP (Reception)

Protocol Detail

8-75

FTP Encrypted TX

5-31

G

Glass Platen

Cleaning

9-2

GPL

xxii

Gray Adjustment

8-51

Grayscale

5-21, Appendix-29

Green Knob

1-6

Grounding the Machine

xi

H

Handles

1-4

Help

Appendix-29

Host Name

8-73

HTTP

Protocol Detail

8-75

HTTPS

Protocol Detail

8-75

Hue adjustment

4-31

I

Image Quality

Send

5-16

Image repeat copy

4-27

Included Guides 2

Installation Precautions

ix

Interface Block

8-80

Internet Browser

8-67

Interrupt Clear Timer

8-59

Interrupt Copy

3-17

IP Address

Appendix-29

IPP

Appendix-29

IPP over SSL

Protocol Detail

8-75

J

Job

Available Status

7-2

Index-4

Index

Canceling 3-42, 7-13

Checking History 7-9

Checking Status 7-2

Detailed Information 7-7

Detailed Information of Histories 7-10

Details of the Status Screens 7-3

Displaying History Screen 7-9

Displaying Status Screens 7-2

Pause and Resumption 7-13

Reordering 7-14

Sending the Log History 7-11

Job Accounting 11-14

Managing the Copier/Printer Counts

11-

18

Restricting the Use of the Machine 11-

18

Job Box

Form Overlay Box 6-17

Private Print/Stored Job Box 6-12

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print

Box 6-13

Repeat Copy Box 6-15

Job Finish Notice 5-29

Copy 4-39

Send 5-29

K

Key Counter Appendix-5

KPDL Appendix-30

L

Label Appendix-16

LAN Cable

Connecting 2-5

LAN Interface

Setup 8-79

LDAP

Protocol Detail 8-75

Left Cover 1 1-4

Left Cover 1 Lever 1-4



Legal Information

xx

Login

3-2, 11-3

Logout

3-2, 11-3

Low Power Timer

8-57

LPD

Protocol Detail

8-75

M

Main Power Switch

1-6

Management

11-1

Job Accounting

11-14

User Login Administration

11-2

Margin/Centering Mode

4-14

Memo Mode

4-24

Mirror Image

4-38


4-6

Combinations

4-6

Copy Size

4-8

Send

5-7

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

xxiv

MP Tray Cleaning

8-53

Multi Purpose (MP) Tray

1-6, Appendix-30

Paper Size and Media

2-30, 8-6

Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types of Destinations )

3-32

N

Negative Image

4-37

NetBEUI

Appendix-30

Protocol Detail

8-75

NetWare

Appendix-30

Setup

8-76

Network

Preparation

2-13

Setup

8-73

Network Cable

2-4

Connecting

2-5

Network Interface

2-4

O

OHP backing sheet mode

4-44

One Touch Key

Changing the Registered

Information

8-65

Deleting the Registered

Index

Information 8-65

Editing 8-65

One-touch image adjust 4-33

Open SSL

xxii

Operation Panel 1-2, 1-4

Option

3,000 sheet document finisher

Appendix-4

3,000 sheet paper feeder Appendix-4

Data Security Kit Appendix-6

Document Finisher Appendix-4

Document Processor Appendix-4

Document Table Appendix-6

Expansion Memory Appendix-6

FAX Kit Appendix-6

Job Separator Appendix-5

Key Counter Appendix-5

Overview Appendix-2

Paper Feeder Appendix-4

Option Interface Slot 1-6

Optional Functions 8-83

Orientation Confirmation 8-15

Original

Loading in the Document

Processor 2-34

Placing on the Platen 2-32

Size

xxviii

Original Cover 1-4

Cleaning 9-2


Copy 4-9

Document Processor 4-9

Orientation Confirmation 8-15

Send 5-11

Original Placement Indicator

Indications and Status 2-35

Original Size Indicator Plates 1-4, 2-32

Original Size Selection

Send 5-2

Original SSLeay License

xxiii

Originals

Automatic Detection 8-9

Copy 4-2

Custom 8-4

Setup 8-4

Size Selection 4-2, 5-2

Index-5

Output Destination

4-11

Output Tray

8-14

P

Page Numbering

4-23

Paper

Appropriate Paper

Appendix-12

Auto Selection

8-9

Before Loading

2-20

Cassette

8-5

Checking the Remaining Amount of

Paper

7-15

Custom

8-4

Default Paper Source

8-9

Loading Envelopes

2-26

Loading in the Cassettes

2-21

Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray

2-24

Multi Purpose Tray

8-6

Paper Source for Cover Paper

8-10

Setup

8-4

Size and Media

2-28, Appendix-10

Special Paper

8-10, Appendix-14

Specifications

Appendix-11

Weight

8-7

Paper Feed Unit

1-6

Paper Feeder

Appendix-4

Paper Jam

10-15

Cassette 1

10-16

Cassette 2

10-17

Cassettes 3 and 4

10-18

Document Finisher

10-29

Document Processor

10-28

Duplex Unit

10-23

Duplex Unit and Cassette 1

10-24

Inside the Left Covers 1, 2 and 3 10-22

Jam Location Indicators

10-15

Multi Purpose Tray

10-19

Precaution

10-16

Paper Length Guide

2-21

Paper Selection

4-3

Cassette

4-3

Multi Purpose Tray

4-4

Paper Width Guides

2-22

Part Names

1-1

Platen

1-4

Index

Placing Originals 2-32

POP3 Appendix-30

POP3 (E-mail RX)


Poster 4-26

PostScript Appendix-30

Power Cable

Connecting 2-6

Power Off 2-8

Power On 2-7

Power Supply

xi

PPM Appendix-30

Precautions for Use

xii

Preparation 2-1

Preparing Cables 2-4

Print Job

Reordering 3-43

Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix-6

Printer

Setup 8-35

Printer Driver Appendix-30

Printer Settings 8-35

Color Setting 8-36

Copies 8-37

CR Action 8-39

Duplex 8-37

EcoPrint 8-36

Emulation 8-35

Form Feed Timeout 8-38

LF Action 8-39

Orientation 8-38

Override A4/Letter 8-37

Paper Feed Mode 8-40

Printing 3-22

Printing from Applications 3-22

Printing Reports/Sending Notice 8-41

Font List 8-41

Network Status Page 8-42

Service Status Page 8-42

Status Page 8-41

Transmission Result Reports 8-42

Priority Override 4-41, 7-14

Product Library 2-2

Programmed Copying 3-46

Editing and Deleting 3-47

Recalling 3-46

Index-6

Registering

3-46

Punch

3-20

Q

Quick No. Search key

1-3, 3-3

Quick Setup Screen

3-43

Changing Registration

3-44, 8-29, 8-30,

8-33

R

RA (Stateless)

Appendix-30

Raw Port

Protocol Detail

8-75

Receive Indicator

1-4

Repeat Copy

4-42

Maximum Number

4-43

Outputting

4-42

Selecting

4-42

Replacement

Toner Container

9-8

Waste Toner Box

9-8

Reserve Next

3-16

Reserve Next Priority

8-28

Resolution

Appendix-21

Restarting the System

8-72

S

Safety Conventions

i

Safety Instructions Regarding the

Disconnection of Power

xvi

Scan Resolution

5-18

Default settings

8-17

Scanner Cleaning

8-53, 8-54

Secure Protocol

8-77

Send

File Format

5-12

Image Quality

5-16

Original Size Selection

5-2

Print

5-30

Sending Size Selection

5-3

Setup

8-30

Store

5-30

Sending

Index

Send as E-mail 3-25

Send to Folder (FTP) 3-28

Send to Folder (SMB) 3-27

Sending E-mail 2-18

Sending Functions 5-1

Sending Settings 8-30

Color Type 8-30, 8-31

Quick Setup Registration 8-30

Sending Size Selection 5-3

Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending) 3-32

Separator

Cleaning 9-5

Setting Date and Time 2-12

Sharpness adjust

Copy 4-34

Send 5-19

Shortcuts 3-48

Adding 3-48

Single Color copy 4-29

Sleep 2-10

Slit Glass 1-4

Cleaning 9-3

SMTP Appendix-31

SMTP (E-mail TX)


SNMP


SNMPv3


Solving Malfunctions 10-2

Specifications

Document Finisher Appendix-24

Document Processor Appendix-23

Environmental Specifications

Appendix-26

Job Separator Appendix-25

Machine Appendix-18

Paper Feeder Appendix-23

Printer Appendix-21

Scanner Appendix-22

Specifying Destination 3-29, 3-30

Status / Job Cancel 7-1

Status Page

8-41, Appendix-31

Subnet Mask Appendix-31

Supplies

Index-7

Checking the Remaining Amount

7-15

Switching the Language

2-11, 8-2

Switching Unit of Measurement

8-11

Symbols

i

System Initialization

8-72

System Menu

8-1

T

TCP/IP

Appendix-31

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Setup

2-13

TCP/IP (IPv6)

Appendix-29

Setup

8-73

Toner Container

1-5

Checking the Remaining Amount of

Toner

7-15

Replacement

9-8

Trade Names

xxi

Transfer Roller

Cleaning

9-6

TWAIN

Appendix-31

U

USB

Appendix-31

USB Cable

Connecting

2-6

USB Interface

1-6, 2-4

USB Memory

Printing Documents

6-20

Removing

6-21

Saving Documents

6-22

User Login Administration

11-2

Adding

11-5

Changing Properties

11-7

Index

Enabling/Disabling 11-2

Group Authorization Settings 11-10

Login 11-3

Logout 11-4

Unknown login user name Job 11-9

W

Waste Toner Box 1-5

Replacement 9-8

Status 7-15

WIA Appendix-32

WSD Print

Setup 8-77

WSD Scan 5-27

Setup 8-76

X

XPS

File formats 5-12, 8-18

Printing documents stored in

Removable USB Memory 6-20

Saving documents to Removable USB

Memory 6-22

Z

Zoom Copying

Auto Zoom 3-10

Manual Zoom 3-10

Preset Zoom 3-10

XY Zoom 3-11

Zoom Mode

Copy 5-5

Send 5-5

Index-8

We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.

E1U

UTAX GmbH, Ohechaussee 235, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany